diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-8.txt | 3557 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 58474 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 1133973 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/34558-h.htm | 2959 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-1.jpg | bin | 0 -> 85303 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-10.jpg | bin | 0 -> 98965 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-11.jpg | bin | 0 -> 66226 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-12.jpg | bin | 0 -> 68809 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-13.jpg | bin | 0 -> 82173 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-14.jpg | bin | 0 -> 63107 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-15.jpg | bin | 0 -> 138477 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-16.jpg | bin | 0 -> 78279 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-17.jpg | bin | 0 -> 55242 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-2.jpg | bin | 0 -> 35011 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-3.jpg | bin | 0 -> 85025 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-4.jpg | bin | 0 -> 94803 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-5.jpg | bin | 0 -> 84775 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-6.jpg | bin | 0 -> 107308 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-7.jpg | bin | 0 -> 94035 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-8.jpg | bin | 0 -> 86460 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-9.jpg | bin | 0 -> 78701 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558-h/images/dti-cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 74980 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558.txt | 3557 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 34558.zip | bin | 0 -> 58452 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
27 files changed, 10089 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/34558-8.txt b/34558-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f5ebc6f --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3557 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Defending the Island, by James Otis + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Defending the Island + A story of Bar Harbor in 1758 + +Author: James Otis + +Release Date: December 4, 2010 [EBook #34558] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DEFENDING THE ISLAND *** + + + + +Produced by Zechariah Stover (ZechariahStover.com) + + + + + + Defending the Island. + + [Frontispiece: Friend or enemy? (see Chapter III.)] + + + + DEFENDING THE ISLAND + A STORY OF BAR HARBOR IN 1758 + BY + JAMES OTIS + + + Boston + DANA ESTES & COMPANY + PUBLISHERS + + + + + + _Copyright, 1904_ + BY DANA ESTES & COMPANY + _All rights reserved_ + + + CONTENTS + I. THE ISLAND + II. THE FIRST ASSAULT + III. A DAY OF SUSPENSE + IV. AN ATTACK + V. FIRE + VI. THE WRECK + + + + + LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS + + Friend or enemy? (See Chapter III.) _Frontispiece_ + "'Indians skulking on the harbor island!'" + "The stout-hearted girl set about the task" + "Susan stood guard at the gateway" + "The children had improvised platforms" + "Mark saw a canoe put off from the Harbor Island" + "'You shall not have the smallest chicken inside this stockade!'" + "'Look! Look! A vessel!'" + "He returned with a heavy log" + "'Do you refuse to surrender?'" + "An instant later the entire party was in retreat" + "Susan's arm was being rebandaged" + "He reëntered the house with a bucket two-thirds full of muddy water" + "Again the crash of thunder drowned all sounds" + "The next knowledge was that the women were trying to nurse him + back to life" + "He gazed at the struggling wretches on the bottom of the wreck" + + + + +Defending the island. + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE ISLAND + + +In the year of grace 1758 there were two families living on that +island which we of to-day call Mount Desert; but Champlain named +Mons Deserts, because its thirteen high, rugged mountains could be +seen from the seaward a distance of twenty leagues, making it the +first landmark of the coast for seamen. + +It is said, by those gentlemen who write down historical facts for +us young people to study, that the "savages were much attached to +the island; for in the mountains they hunted bears, wildcats, +raccoons, foxes, and fowls; in the marshes and natural meadows, +beaver, otter and musquash; and in the waters they took fin and +shellfish." + +Now in the proper kind of a story there should be nothing which +savors of school-book study, and yet, before telling how the +children of these two families defended the island in 1758, it seems +much as if the reader would have a better idea of all that was done, +if he or she knew just a few facts concerning those who lived on +Mount Desert before Stephen Pemberton and Silas Harding took there +their wives and children to build for themselves homes. + +It is said, by those who busy themselves with finding out about such +things, that in the year 1605 Champlain stopped at the island and +named it; but not until four years later did any white people visit +the place. Then two Jesuit missionaries, who had been living at Port +Royal, under the protection of Monsieur Biencourt, went to Mount +Desert with the hope of converting the Indians to Christianity. + +How long these good men lived there, no one seems to know; but it is +certain that they went back to Port Royal quite soon, because, in +the year 1613, a Frenchman, by the name of La Suassaye, the agent of +Madame de Guercheville, a very rich and religious lady, visited Port +Royal, and persuaded the missionaries to return to Mount Desert, in +company with several French colonists. + +An Englishman by the name of Argall, who had come across the ocean +to drive away the French people from North America, in order to take +possession of the country in the name of his king, found the +settlers while they were yet living in tents, not having had time to +build houses. He robbed them of all their goods, afterward sending +them adrift in an open boat, to make certain they wouldn't encroach +on the land to which he believed they had no claim. + +The French people, after suffering severely, contrived to gain the +mainland, however, and before many months had passed returned to +Mount Desert, where they formed a settlement, which did not survive +the encroachments of the Indians, as is known from the fact that +when, in 1704, the great Indian fighter from Massachusetts, Major +Benjamin Church, rendezvoused at Mount Desert, before attacking the +Baron de Castine on Penobscot Bay, he found no person living there. + +In 1746 Stephen Pemberton and Silas Harding, with their wives, who +were sisters, and their children, emigrated from England to Acadia, +in Nova Scotia, hoping there to make better homes for themselves and +their little ones than could be had in their native land. Then came +the quarrels between the French and English, until Acadia was not a +very pleasant land in which to live, and these two settlers +determined to find an abiding-place where they might not be +literally overrun by the soldiers of two armies. + +Therefore it was that they built a small vessel, in which they could +carry all their household belongings, including two cows, three or +four pigs, and a flock of chickens, and started on a voyage that did +not come to an end until they were arrived at the island of Mount +Desert, near the mouth of what is now known as Duck Brook, within a +short distance of the present town of Bar Harbor. + +There the men built two small houses of logs, enclosed by a +palisade, which is a high fence formed by driving stakes into the +ground, for protection against the Indians, whom they had every +reason to fear. + +Here the two families lived in peace and comparative comfort until +the year 1758, and then there were children in plenty. + +Stephen Pemberton had in his family Mark, who was fifteen years old; +Luke, two years younger; Mary, aged eleven and John, a stout lad of +eight years. + +Silas Harding's children were Susan, who was fourteen years old; +Mary, four years younger, and James, who had lived seven years on +Mount Desert without having seen ten white people, save those +belonging to his own and Uncle Stephen Pemberton's family. + +Now after so many words which have not been strung together in a +very entertaining fashion, it is time to begin the story of what was +done by these children, with, as a matter of course, some assistance +from their mothers. + +Each summer, just before the work of harvesting should be begun, the +two men went out in the boat which had brought them from Acadia, to +catch fish enough for the winter's supply, and on this year they set +off early in September, with never a thought that any danger might +menace their dear ones after so many years of peace and comparative +prosperity. + +The children had work in plenty to keep them from idleness during +the week of ten days their fathers might be absent, and no sooner +had the little vessel sailed out of the harbor than they set about +their several tasks in order that all the labor might be performed +by the time the fishermen returned. + +Mark and Luke were engaged in setting up the flakes, or framework, +on which the fish were to be dried, and this labor was performed +near the shore of the harbor quite beyond sight of the homesteads +with the high palisade, which last hid from view all save the roofs +of the buildings. + +The _Future Hopes_, which was the name of the small vessel belonging +to the settlers, had left her moorings when the first gray light of +the coming day could be seen stealing over the waters, and while she +was yet close in-shore the two lads set about building the flakes, +counting on completing the task within three days, and to that end +working so industriously as to give little or no heed to what might +be passing around them. + +Therefore it was that they failed to see a canoe, in which were five +Indians, come swiftly up from the southward, past what is now known +as Pulpit Rock, and sail straight for the island at the mouth of the +harbor, which the people of to-day call Bar Island. + +Here the frail craft was hidden from view of the boys, and when half +an hour or more had gone by, another canoe, this one carrying six +men, executed the same maneuver. + +Five minutes later a third craft appeared, but just as she came in +view past the rock, Luke stood erect to drive in one of the stakes, +and, therefore, saw the strangers as they were evidently trying to +steal by without being seen. + +More than once since Luke could remember had Mount Desert been +visited by red men of the Abenakis tribe; but the visitors had +always approached boldly, like friends, and this skulking from rock +to island seemed much like a show of enmity. + +Certain it is that the lad was alarmed, but he understood, from what +his father had said many times, that it was not wise to let the +Indians know of his fear, and, continuing at the labor, he said, in +a low tone, to Mark: + +"Don't raise your head, nor look around. A canoe filled with +Abenakis has sneaked in behind the harbor island; can it be mischief +is intended?" + +"They may be after rock-cod, and count on coming ashore later," Mark +replied, continuing his work in such a fashion that he could look +seaward without seeming to do so. + +At this moment the occupants of the last canoe were moving around +the point of the island, as if to gain a position where a full view +of the buildings might be had, for there could be no possibility the +visitors were engaged in fishing, of any other such peaceful pursuit. + +"There's trouble of some kind, and it's for us to find out what," +Mark said, in a whisper. "There must have been other canoes than the +one you saw, for I have already counted eleven men on the island, +and they could not all have come in a single boat." + +The boys had had no experience, fortunately for them, in Indian +warfare, but they had heard enough from their parents to be fully +alive to the possibilities, and after a few moments, during which +time fear had held them speechless, Mark said, in a low tone, +although there was no chance the enemy could have heard him: + +"We must get over to the house without seeming to be running away. +You start first, and when you go through the gate, call out that +mother wants to see me." + +Luke obeyed leisurely, although his heart was beating so loudly and +heavily that it seemed as if it could be heard a long distance away, +and, arriving at the palisade, he summoned his brother, as had been +proposed. + +Then it was that Mark was at liberty to leave his work, and he +answered the summons more quickly, perhaps, than ever before in his +life. + +Mistress Pemberton was busily engaged inside the house, and the +other two children were in a small garden directly in the rear of +the building, therefore the boys were able to impart the +disagreeable tidings without alarming those who could be of little +or no assistance. + +"Indians skulking on the harbor island!" the good woman exclaimed, +when Mark had hurriedly told his story and her face paled as the +lads had never seen it before. + +"And they have chanced to come on the very day our father went +fishing!" Luke cried. + +"It wasn't chance that brought them, my son. Unless coming for some +evil purpose, they would have landed boldly, as they have done so +many times. It must be that the painted wretches have been watching +to learn when your father and uncle left the island! Ask your aunt +and Susan to come over her; the other children need not be told +until it is no longer possible to hold them in ignorance of what may +be done." + +Luke ran swiftly to the house, which stood hardly more than fifty +feet away, and in a twinkling Mistress Harding and her daughter +Susan were where they could hear what, to settlers in their +situation, was the worst possible news. + +[Illustration: "Indians skulking on the harbor island!"] + +Women who did their share in conquering the wilderness were not +cowardly, even though they might turn pale with apprehension when +the first note of danger was sounded, and there two, knowing it was +useless to expect aid from the outside, lost no time in planning a +defence. + +The palisade was weak in many places; more than one of the timbers +had decayed and fallen, for while the Indians from the near-by +mainland were friendly disposed, there seemed to be no good reason +why time and labor should be expended upon a means of defence which +might never be needed, and at this moment both the women bethought +themselves of such fact. + +"There may be time in which to strengthen the fence," Mistress +Harding suggested, and Mark, who considered himself as well-nigh +being a man grown, took the part of leader by saying, stoutly: + +"In can be done, aunt. Luke and I will get the timbers, and the +other children shall drag them out of the woods, coming into the +enclosure near the spring where the Indians cannot see them." + +"But surely we can do something to help the work along," his mother +said, quickly. + +"So you shall. We must know what the Indians are about, and you two +can take one of the small boys down near the shore. Stay there as if +bent on pleasuring, and, without seeming to do so, keep a sharp +watch on the harbor island. I will look after the rest." + +Boys who lived on the frontier in 1758 were accustomed to doing the +work of men, and very seldom was one found to be a coward. + +Now that danger in its most frightful form menaced, Mark Pemberton +understood that he must stand in the place of his father and uncle. +And there was no disposition on his part to shirk the +responsibility. He knew full well that there was no hope the +fishermen would return for at least a full week, therefore he must +work unaided, save as the women and other children might be able to +help him. + +The axes were near at hand; Mary Pemberton and Ellen Harding were +summoned from the garden, and the two younger boys sent with their +mothers to the shore. + +As the five young people went into the thicket, which had been left +standing in the rear of the dwellings that it might serve to break +the force of the north winds in the winter, the younger girls +learned of the painted peril on the harbor island, and Mark +explained his plan of defence, so far as he had formed one. + +The two boys set about their task feverishly, knowing that every +moment was precious, for no one could say when the attack might be +made; the only matter certain in the minds of all was that the +Indians had come bent on mischief, otherwise there would have been +no skulking on the island. + +The palisade, as originally built, stood six feet above the surface +of the land, and the posts were driven a good four feet into the +ground, therefore large timbers were necessary, and perhaps Mark was +the only member of the party who realized that when the work of +driving the logs in place was begun, the enemy would have a very +good idea of what was being done. + +The skulkers on the island must, as a matter of course, know that +they were discovered, and their purpose suspected, otherwise the +defences would not be in process of strengthening when the boys +should have been making ready for the curing of such fish as the +fishermen might bring in. + +Then was the moment when, possibly, the attack would be made, and +all preparations for resistance concluded before the first blow was +struck on the palisade. + +"There will be a moon to-night," Susan Harding said, quietly, and +Mark knew she was thinking of what might be expected after the sun +had set, therefore he replied, to encourage her: + +"Ay, Sue, the painted villains can't come across without showing +themselves for some time before gaining the beach, and Luke and I +should be able to warm their hides a bit." + +"I can shoot as well as you." + +"So you can, Sue and the worst part of it is that you must do your +share of the work." + +"Will you watch on the shore for them to-night?" + +"I think so. Luke and I can be there, while the rest of you are +inside." + +"I shall go with you," and the girl spoke as if demanding a part in +some scheme of pleasure. + +"Perhaps you can; we'll see what the plan shall be when night comes. +The fence may not be in shape then, and I'm hoping the Indians will +hold off for a darker night. That's about the only chance we've got +to save ourselves from being killed, or carried prisoners to Canada." + +"If they had landed on this island, they might have crept up without +our suspecting anything," Susan suggested, and Mark literally +trembled with fear, for thought came to his mind that possibly +another body of savages was on Mount Desert, counting on coming up +through the thicket when the attack was begun. + +However, as he said to himself a moment later, after struggling +manfully against this new fear which assailed him, that was a matter +which could not be guarded against, other than as the general +defences were strengthened, and it stood him in hand to think of +work rather than all which might happen. + +"Remember, I'm to take my place with you and Luke," Susan insisted, +and the lad, knowing she could be depended upon to use a musket +nearly as well as himself, replied: + +"So you shall, Sue; I promise to call on you as I would on Luke. +Here is the first timber," he added, as he struck the finishing +blows to the sharpened end of the log. "Drag it inside to the +weakest place in the fence, and take good care that you don't go +where any one on the harbor island can see you." + +Aided by Mary and Ellen, the stout-hearted girl set about the task +of carrying the heavy log, since that would be the quickest method +of getting it into place, and the boys plied their axes yet more +vigorously in order to have another timber in readiness when the +carriers returned. + +[Illustration: The stout-hearted girl set about the task.] + +"Take nothing smaller than six inches through the butt, and we'll +drive the tapering end into the ground," Mark cried, cheerily, as he +selected a second tree, and Luke had but just finished hewing his +log when the girls came for another load. + +"I ran down to talk with mother and aunt," Susan said, speaking with +difficulty because of her heavy breathing. "They have seen only one +Indian, who lies behind the big rock keeping watch, and he is +Sewattis, who came here for potatoes last winter." + +"And we gave him all he could carry away!" Mark exclaimed bitterly. +"Now he has come to try and murder us because we have ever been his +good friends." + +"Is there any war on the mainland?" Susan asked. + +"The captain of the last fishing-vessel father boarded told him that +an attack had been made by the French and Indians on the fort at St. +George last month, so I suppose England and France are still +fighting. If the two kings could be in our places just now, I reckon +there'd be an end of the war before nightfall." + +"It isn't three months since Master Peabody and his wife were killed +on Arrowsick Island, and the six children carried into Canada," +Luke suggested, grimly, and Mark cried, peremptorily: + +"Don't be digging up every horrible thing you can remember, for it +won't improve our courage, and we're like to need all we've got +between now and sunset. Here's another timber, Sue. Before you come +back again, get some idea of how many we're needing to put the fence +in shape." + +Luke would have talked of the murders which had been reported to the +settlers of the island by the fishermen, who were spoken from time +to time; but Mark bade him keep at his chopping, and in silence the +two worked until Susan, after an unusually long absence, returned. + +"There are seventeen logs missing," she reported, "and two more +which are decayed so badly that they should be replaced. I walked +slowly around the fence, and tried every one, to make certain it +stood firm." + +"We should be able to cut that number and get them in place before +the afternoon is very old," Mark replied, as he swung his axe yet +more vigorously. "Did you go down to the shore?" + +"Yes, and everything there is as it was before. Your mother thinks +it is a wicked waste of time for both to stay on guard, when it +would be possible for them to do so much toward helping in getting +out the timbers." + +"The moment will soon come when she can lend a hand, but just now +she is doing more good by staying where she is, for while those two +are idle the Indians will not suspect that we are strengthening our +defences. The other boys might help in dragging the logs down, Sue, +for we've got five or six ready." + +"Mary and I, with Ellen to steady them through the bushes, can soon +catch up with you, and the boys would be more bother than good," +Susan replied, as she raised one end of a heavy timber. + +During the next hour the five young people worked as industriously +as their elders could have done, and then Susan announced that her +mother was intending to make ready the noonday meal, for it was in +the highest degree necessary that those who were laboring so +energetically, and who would be called upon, perhaps, to spend the +night in watching, should have an ample supply of food. + +The boys ate dinner as they worked, Ellen bringing it out to them, +and, while Mistress Harding cooked for both families, Mistress +Pemberton remained on guard. + +During all that time very little had been learned regarding the +savages. Now and then a painted face had been seen momentarily from +behind one of the rocks on the harbor island; but nothing more, and +the defenders of the stockade had no means of knowing when the +attack might be expected. + +It was about two hours past noon when the boys had cut the necessary +number of timbers, and now was come the time when the enemy would +get an inkling that the settlers were making ready to defend +themselves. + +"You can't help us very much, Sue, when we are driving the posts +into place," Mark said. "Leave Ellen here, while you overhaul our +muskets. See to it that each one is loaded, and where we can get at +it readily. After that has been done, you had best stand by the +gateway to give the work if any move is made by the villains." + +Then the boys began the task of setting the timbers in place, +fearing each instant to hear the word that the savages were crossing +over from the small island. + +When the third timber had been driven in place, Mark said, grimly, +as he raised another stick to fit it into the palisade: + +"If they come now, we shall be in a bad scrape; but in case they are +foolish enough to wait until after dark, I reckon we can give a good +account of ourselves." + +In order to drive the logs sufficiently deep into the earth, to +prevent the possibility of their being pulled out by the foe, it was +necessary for one of the boys to stand on an up-ended cask, and +while in suck position a view of the tiny island at the mouth of the +harbor could readily be had. + +It was Mark who swung the heavy wooden maul, or mallet, and he +strove to keep his eyes fixed upon that point of land behind which +he knew the Indians lurked. + +To his great relief, no change was apparent in the position of the +enemy, although those in hiding must have known what was being done, +and the boys worked unmolested. + +After she had make ready the muskets for immediate use, Susan +stationed herself at the gateway of the palisade, with a weapon +leaning against the logs on the inside, watching intently, and after +half an hour had passed Mark called to her: + +"There's little chance now that they'll begin the mischief before +dark, if the noise of our pounding hasn't started them. Mother and +aunt may come back here and do some more cooking, for once the +Abenakis begin work we shall need to have all hands on duty. You can +keep an eye on the island from where you are." + +[Illustration: Susan stood guard at the gateway.] + +This change was welcomed by the women, who came up from the shore +quickly, stopping at the palisade to see how the lads were getting +along, when Mistress Pemberton said to Mark: + +"I have been thinking that we had better gather in one of the +buildings which can be barricaded on the inside, instead of trying +to occupy both." + +"It's a good idea, mother dear, and while you're making the changes, +see to it that we have plenty of water in the house." + +"What about the cows?" + +"We can't take the chances of going after them, for no one can say +that there are not more Indians hidden in the woods. If the beasts +come home, we'll have a mess of milk to help out on the supplies." + +Now it was that every member of the two families was actively +engaged, while Susan stood guard at the gateway. + +The Harding house was stripped of everything which could be readily +moved, and the rude furniture served admirably as a barricade for +the windows and one door of the Pemberton dwelling. + +The sun had not set when Mark had put the palisade into the best +condition possible with the materials at his command, and then, +after cautioning Susan to keep her eyes open very wide, the two boys +began making loopholes in the house which was to shelter both +families. This last was being done, as Mark explained to his mother, +that they might have a final place of refuge in case the Indians +succeeded in scaling the palisade. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +THE FIRST ASSAULT + + +Not until the shadows of night were beginning to lengthen was Susan +relieved from guard duty, and then the gate had been closed and +barred by Mark, who said to his cousin: + +"There is little chance an attack will be made until after night has +come, when they count on finding us asleep, mayhap, although it +would be queer people who could close their eyes in rest while a +crowd of men was waiting for a good opportunity to kill them." + +"Why am I to go off duty?" Susan asked. "Surely it can do us no harm +to stand guard, and even though the savages do not make any move, we +should act as if believing they might do so at any moment." + +"You are right, Sue, and I warrant you won't have many idle minutes. +Your mother and mine want all the children together while they pray +for the good God to help us, and surely He is the only one to whom +we can appeal now." + +The girl made no further parley, but marched directly toward the +Pemberton house, stopping very suddenly, however, as a low sound, +not unlike the call of a human being, was heard from the woods in +the rear of the dwellings. + +"There are the cows, Mark, and surely they must be brought inside +the enclosure if for no other reason than that we may need the milk +before those murderers--" + +Susan did not finish the sentence, for the thought had come that it +was not unlikely those who were skulking on the harbor island might +succeed in their purpose, as they had done so many times before when +setting forth to capture and to murder. + +"I'll go after the beasts, and you shall stand here to keep watch +over the harbor, for I am not minded to take the chances of being +surprised, ever though we have good reason to believe no mischief +will be attempted until late in the night." + +To this Susan would not agree. She insisted that, having been +charged with the care of the cows during so many years, they would +follow her more readily than any other, and it might be possible +something would happen to frighten them. + +Mark, who feared there were Indians hidden in the thicket, would +have prevented her from venturing out of the stockade; but she put +an end to the controversy by slipping through the gate immediately +he had opened it, and the lad could do no less than remain on guard +while she was absent. + +The animals followed the girl contentedly when she appeared before +them, even though they were not accustomed to being brought within +the enclosure during the warm season, and as they filed through the +gate Mark felt decidedly more comfortable in mind, for now, in case +they were able to hold the Indians in check, there was no +possibility of a lack of food if the siege should be prolonged. + +With the cows in the shed that served as stable during the winter +months, where was a plentiful supply of hay which had been made +during the summer, the children went into the house, which seemed +strangely changed by the addition of Mistress Harding's belongings +and preparations already made for defence. + +Nearly all the rude furniture was piled against the two windows and +one of the doors, and the beds had been spread on the floor where +they would best be screened from any stray bullets. A supply of fuel +was stacked up near the fireplace, to the end that it might be +possible to prepare food without necessity of going out of doors, +and, as Mark had suggested, every available vessel was filled with +water. + +When the three children, who had been doing such valiant work in +strengthening the defences, entered the building, they found the +women and smaller children gathered close beside each other as if +such near companionship lessened the danger, and Mark said, gently: + +"It is not well that we stay indoors many minutes, mother dear, for +much remains to be done before night has fully come." + +Then it was, and without delay, that Mistress Pemberton knelt amid +the frightened brood, pouring forth her supplications for strength +and guidance in this their time of peril, and the children listened +to the petition as they had never done before. It was as if the +prayer had a different meaning than ever before, for unless it +should be answered then was the time of suffering or of death come +very near. + +Even the youngest children understood that this was the only appeal +for help which could be made, and never a question was asked or a +word spoken when Mark, Luke, and Susan, rising to their feet +immediately the petition had been brought to a close went +out-of-doors muskets in hand. + +When they were in the open air once more Mark proposed that they +make such platforms behind the palisade as was practical with the +limited amount of material at hand, in order that, in event of an +attack, it would be possible to use their weapons with good effect +to prevent the enemy from scaling the barricade. + +Two up-ended casks formed as many stations, while at other points +the wash-benches, tubs, horses for wood-sawing, and household +utensils were piled up or pushed unto position at such height as +would afford a view of the harbor island and the intervening space. + +When this work had been completed the children had eight improvised +platforms whereon they could stand while defending the stockade, and +the night was fully come. + +[Illustration: The children had improvised platforms.] + +As Susan had said, the moon was in the third quarter, therefore it +would be impossible for the Indians to paddle across the waters of +the harbor without exposing themselves to the view of the island +defenders. + +It was a portion of Mark's plan that a guard should be stationed on +the shore, in full sight of those who might approach, and, in event +of an advance, the battle would be begun while the enemy was in the +canoes. + +This much he explained to his companions, as they stood by the gate +ready to face the more immediate danger to the end that their loved +ones might the better be protected, and he added, in conclusion: + +"After all we've seen it would be foolish to pretend we do not know +why the Abenakis have come, therefore when they put out from the +island, I shall hail them once, warning all hands to stay where they +are until the sun has risen, after which we will open fire, trying +to do the greatest possible amount of execution in order to show +what may be expected. I've got four of five charges of ammunition, +and if the rest of you have as much we shall be able to make quite a +showing." + +At that moment the noise of someone moving across the enclosure +startled the children; but an instant later they saw that Mistress +Harding was going toward the shed to milk the cows. + +"Now come on," Mark said, opening the gate after learning the cause +of his momentary alarm, and the children went boldly forth to do +battle--two boys and a girl who counted on defending the island +against fifteen or twenty savages. + +It was not to e supposed that the Indians, seeing the sentinels, +would come directly across from the island; but might be expected to +dart swiftly toward one or the other headlands, and therefore it was +that Mark divided his small force, sending Luke to patrol the +northern point, while he paced to and fro on the southern side of +the harbor where it was more reasonable to suppose a landing would +be attempted. Susan was to walk back and forth on the shore between +the two lads. + +Once this division of forces had been made, the children began their +vigil, on the alert for any suspicious noises either behind or in +front of them, for there was yet a possibility that a force of +Indians was already secreted near the stockade. + +No sooner had he begun to pace his beat than Mark realized to what +danger the occupants of the dwelling were exposed in case the +savages had already landed on Mount Desert, for the gate of the +palisade was unlocked and unguarded, and then Susan was sent back to +warn her mother and aunt that the entrance must be secured. + +When she returned to the shore it was with the report that the gate +was barred on the inside, and Mary Pemberton standing close beside +it in case the sentinels outside should be forced to beat a hasty +retreat. + +Now indeed had the lad done all within his power to protect those +whom he considered were entrusted to his charge, and it only +remained to keep careful watch for the first show of mischief. + +And this came in a manner wholly unexpected, although it seemed to +the young leader as if he had taken into consideration every method +which might be adopted by the savages. + +During three hours or more the children had paced to and fro on the +shore, each making certain meanwhile that the other two were on the +alert, and then Mark saw a canoe put off from the harbor island, +heading toward Pulpit Rock, as if to gain the shelter of that +headland before coming to land. + +Uttering a low cry to attract the attention of his companions, he +would have hurried on to the point in order to fire at least one +shot before the Indians could disembark; but at that moment an +exclamation from Luke caused him to gaze across the harbor, when he +saw a second canoe setting out toward the northward. + +A moment later a third craft was paddled straight across the water, +in the direction of Susan's post of duty. + +It seemed certain that the Abenakis understood how small and weak +was the force opposed to them, and therefore, counted on bringing +their bloody work to a speedy conclusion regardless of their +ordinary methods of warfare. + +[Illustration: Mark saw a canoe put off from the harbor island.] + +A landing would be made at three different places simultaneously, +and the young defenders must perforce give all their attention to +one party, leaving the others to do as they pleased, or, by +attempting to guard every point, place themselves in the greatest +possible danger. + +"Make ready to run for the house when I give the word," Mark cried +to his companions. "Come this way, Sue, and Luke, do the best you +can at peppering the canoe in front of us!" + +Susan speedily joined her cousin on the southerly side of the +harbor, while Luke stood his ground, but with the disagreeable +knowledge that in a few moments the savages would probably be +creeping up behind him. + +Now Mark understood that he could not afford to spend many moments +on this portion of the defence. It was necessary the three should be +inside the stockade before those who were landing at either point of +the harbor could come up within range, and he said to Susan: + +"We must get in our work quickly, for I reckon these villains in +front of us will take good care to move so slowly as to keep at a +safe distance until the others are ready for work." + +For reply the girl raised her musket on the crutch-like rest which +was used in those days, took careful aim, and pulled the trigger. + +It was possible to see the bullet as it struck the moonlit water, +hardly more than three paces in advance of the canoe, with its +freight of painted terrors, and instantly the Indians ceased +paddling, thus proving that they had no intention of coming within +range until their comrades from the other craft were in position to +prosecute their murderous work. + +"There is little sense in our staying here," Mark said, bitterly. +"Those scoundrels don't intend to give us any show at them, and we +are foolish if we remain. Yonder canoe put off boldly only to keep +us occupied until the others could make a landing." + +"Are we to go back?" Susan asked, striving to prevent a tremor of +fear from being perceptible in her voice. + +"Ay, it is high time. You start on ahead, and I'll call Luke." + +"I shall walk by your side," the girl said, stoutly. "We will share +the danger equally, as you promised." + +"You are a good girl, Sue; just the kind that will do a full half of +the work of defending the island," and Mark kissed her on the cheek +more tenderly than he had ever done before, as one would who was +whispering a final good-bye. + +"Close in, Luke; we must get back to the house; there's no show of +our being able to do anything here," Mark cried to his brother, as +he set the example by leading Susan in the direction of the stockade. + +The canoe came forward more swiftly as the little party of children +retreated; but it could be seen that its occupants did not count on +approaching within range, and Mark hastened his brother's movements +by shouting: + +"Run for it, lad! We must be in position behind the fence when the +brutes first come within view!" + +Then the three went toward the place of refuge at full speed, and +behind the gate, having been warned by the report of her cousin's +musket, Mary Pemberton stood ready to let down the heavy bar when +the little party was near at hand. + +The retreat had been begun none too soon, as was seen when the +children came within the enclosure, for while Mark was replacing the +bar which locked the gate, his mother, standing on one of the +improvised platforms, discharged a musket. + +"What have you seen?" the lad cried, as, the gate having been +fastened, he ran toward that portion of the stockade where was his +mother. + +"An Indian came out just beyond the dead tree, over there." + +"Did you hit him?" + +"I'm afraid not, Mark; I never could send a bullet straight, and am +now blaming myself for not having practiced more often after your +father insisted that the time might come when I would need to handle +a musket deftly." + +By this time Mark stood by his mother's side, peering cautiously out +over the top of the palisade, which was not a simple matter, since +he took the risk of presenting the enemy with a target. + +He could see nothing suspicious, and was yet peering eagerly around, +when the report of a musket rang out on the other side of the +stockade. + +It was Susan who fired the shot. At the same moment Mark clambered +up beside his mother, the girl had taken her station on one of the +casks at a point overlooking the thicket, and the result showed that +she had arrived there none too soon. + +"Did you see an Indian?" Luke asked, as he mounted one of the +wash-benches near the gate. + +"Ay, and hit him, too!" Susan replied, grimly, as she turned to +recharge her weapon; but Mistress Harding took the empty musket +from her hands, as she said: + +"Your aunt and I cannot shoot as well as you children; but we may, +at least, be of service in loading the guns." + +From this moment there was little delay in making the assault. +Contrary to their custom, the Abenakis pressed forward immediately +after the first shot was fired, doubtless hoping to gain an +advantage while the defenders were reloading the weapons, and each +of the three children fired two shots as rapidly as the muskets +could be handed to them. + +Three times had a piercing scream followed the report of the weapon, +thus telling that an equal number of bullets had hit the targets, +and then the savages became more cautious. + +Until this moment the Indians had not fired a shot; but now the +bullets began to whistle over the heads of those who were exposed to +view, as the Abenakis, themselves screened by the bushes, began the +real attack. + +"Be careful of yourselves!" Mark cried, forgetting to set his +companions an example. "Keep down behind the posts as much as +possible; we can count on their staying under cover while doing so +much shooting!" Then, turning to his mother, he added, "There is no +reason why all the children should be out-of-doors, where a stray +bullet may find them. Why not order them into the house?" + +This Mistress Pemberton did, and when the younger members of the +company were in comparative safety, Mark looked anxiously around at +his army of two. + +Luke was crouching behind the palisade, where a wide crevice between +two of the posts afforded him a view of the outside without his +being obliged to expose himself, and Susan was leaning against the +timbers, only partially sheltered, as she appeared to be tying +something around her arm. + +"What are you doing, Sue?" Mark cried, in alarm. + +"Standing guard here; but just now I can't see anything that looks +like an Indian." + +"What is the matter with your arm?" + +"It's only a scratch," the girl replied, in a matter-of-fact tone. +"It bleeds a little, and I've wrapped a piece of my gown around it." + +"You're wounded!" Mark cried, and he made as if to jump down from +the platform, when Susan said, sharply: + +"Stay where you are! Even though I was hurt badly, which I'm not, +you have no right to leave the fence unguarded." + +Mark stepped back with a certain sense of shame that it had been +necessary for Susan to remind him of his duty, and then Mistress +Harding went to her daughter's side. + +"It is a slight wound on the left arm," the good woman said, after +insisting on an examination of the injury. "I will take her to the +house while I tie it up properly, and Ellen may stand here in her +place." + +"But Ellen can't use a musket as well as I, and we're needed here," +Susan cried, more concerned lest she be forced to leave her station +at the palisade than on account of the wound. + +Mistress Harding might have insisted on her daughter's going into +the building if at that moment the assault had not been renewed, and +during the next ten minutes the defenders were actively employed. + +The Indians, profiting by the teachings and example of the +Frenchmen, whose allies they were, had divided the force, a portion +remaining hidden in the thicket to fire at the children, while the +remainder made a rush for the gate, as if believing it might be +forced open. + +Now it was that the defenders were obliged to move quickly, and it +was impossible for them to remain under cover all the while. + +"Pour all the fire into those fellows who are coming up with the +log!" Mark cried, as half a dozen Abenakis, carrying a heavy +tree-trunk, to be used as a battering-ram, made ready to advance at +full speed. + +This command was obeyed with such good effect that three of the +savages fell, and their fellows, dropping the timber, ran to cover +with the greatest possible haste. + +At the same moment the children fired, the Indians in hiding +discharged their weapons, detonations being echoed and reëchoed +from mountain to mountain, until it sounded as if a severe +engagement was in progress. + +"Any one hurt?" Mark cried, and Susan and Luke replied cheerily in +the negative. + +One of the three Indians wounded while advancing with the tree-trunk +succeeded in crawling off to the shelter of the underbrush; but the +other two remained where they had fallen. + +When, two or three minutes later, an Abenakis darted out from his +place of concealment, Mark raised his weapon quickly; but Susan +cried, warningly: + +"Don't fire! It can do us no harm if they take away the wounded, and +it's possible they'll go back to the harbor island, if the injured +can be carried off!" + +"I'm beginning to think it is you who should be in command here," +Mark said, half to himself, as he lowered his weapon. "You've got +more sound sense than Luke and I together." Then, raising his voice, +he cried, loudly, "Listen, ye Abenakis, whom our fathers have fed +when you were hungry, and sheltered when you were cold, but who +would murder us now! Take away your wounded, if you are minded to go +back to the harbor island, and no one shall harm you while so doing. +The white men of Mount Desert have never broken faith with you, nor +will we, their children." + +Then was done that which proves how much stranger than fiction is +truth. The Abenakis, although they had come there to kill or make +prisoners the wives and children of those men who had ever been +their friends, did not question the faith of the lad when he +announced that they might bear off the wounded in safety, but boldly +advanced within short range to the aid of their fellows. + +"Why do you seek to kill us, who have never done you harm?" Mark +cried, when four of the band stood in full view while lifting the +wounded from the ground. "Do Indians kill their friends? Do they +speak soft words only while the men of the family are at home, being +too cowardly to make an attack until the fathers have gone away?" + +There was no reply to this speech until the Indians were hidden once +more by the bushes, and then a voice cried: + +"Give us the cow and two boys. Then we will go away, telling the +Frenchmen that all have been killed." + +"You shall not have the smallest chicken inside this stockade!" Mark +cried, angrily. "And I promise that there shall be few left to +report to the cowardly Frenchmen, if you remain here very long. You +shall be shot down like dogs, and from this out our squaws will not +interfere to let you carry off those who have been crippled!" + +While speaking, Mark had unconsciously raised himself to his full +height, instead of being partially sheltered by remaining in a +crouching position, as during the short fight, and the reply to his +words came in the form of bullets, one of which grazed his cheek, +raising a red ridge, as if he had been scored by a whip-lash. + +Susan and Luke both fired in the direction from which had been seen +the flash of the muskets, but no one could say if the missiles thus +sent at random took effect. + +Five minutes later, while the watchers still gazed through the +crevices of the palisade, believing the enemy to be near at hand, a +canoe was seen putting off from the shore, directly in front of the +dwellings, and, after such delay as was necessary, in order to +enable them to reach the other craft, all three divisions of the +attacking force were headed for the harbor island. + +[Illustration: "You shall not have the smallest chicken inside this +stockade!"] + +The first assault had been made, and successfully resisted. It now +remained to be seen whether the Abenakis were willing to accept this +as defeat, of if new tactics were to be tried. + +"They've gone!" Susan cried, joyfully. "We've beaten them!" + +"Yes child," her mother said, despondently, "and if they had not +been sent by Frenchmen, we might believe the worst was over." + +"Do you think they'll come back, Mark?" the girl cried, as she +leaped down from her post of duty. + +"Ay, that I do, Susan, and for the very reason aunt has given. If we +could only know what the next move would be! I have heard father say +that once upon a time the English drove away from Mount Desert +French settlers, and now those who are stirring the Indians up to +this kind of business are trying to make things even. We can count +on having peace during the rest of the night, I believe, and the +sooner you go into the house, were that wound of yours can be looked +after, the better I shall be pleased." + +Indeed, there was no good reason why all the defenders, save one to +stand guard behind the palisade, should not get such repose as might +be had under the circumstances. + +A sentinel, on one of the hastily constructed platforms, could keep +the harbor island well in view, therefore the savages would not be +able to leave it secretly, and Mark proposed that he remain on duty +for a certain time, while the others slept. + +"You shall have my place in a couple of hours, Luke." the lad said +to his brother. + +"And when do I take my turn?" Susan asked, showing that she was +determined to do a full share in the defence, regardless of her +wound. + +"You may stand guard when it is time for Luke to lie down," Mark +replied, intending that she should not be awakened if he could +prevent it. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +A DAY OF SUSPENSE + + +While Mark stood on guard, able to see the entire broad expanse of +water, thanks to the light of the moon, he knew that so long as a +careful watch was kept the Abenakis could not leave the harbor +island secretly; but he also realized that if the clouds should +gather, or a fog settle down over the waters, then, of a verity, +would they be at the mercy of a foe from whom no mercy could be +expected. + +The fact that they had been able to resist the first assault did not +give him encouragement for the future. The Indians had advanced +foolishly, understanding that the white people knew full well what +they were about, and after this first repulse it was reasonable to +suppose the murderous scoundrels would bring all their cunning into +play when the next attack was made. + +There were six muskets in the stockade, and ammunition sufficient to +last during an ordinary siege, provided none was wasted, yet but +three persons--Susan, Luke, and himself--could be depended upon to +man the walls. The others would have served faithfully, of that +there was no question; but none of them were so expert with a musket +as to be counted on for any great execution. + +Although the lad would not have admitted as much to either of his +companions, the fear in his heart that the enemy might succeed in +accomplishing his purpose was very great. + +"We can count on it that at the next attack they will succeed in +getting inside the palisade," he said, unconsciously giving words to +his thoughts, and he started almost in alarm as a familiar voice +behind him asked, reproachfully: + +"If you lose heart, how can the rest of us be expected to show +courage?" + +"What are you doing out here, Sue?" he asked, in turn, not minded to +answer her question, if it could be avoided. + +"I've come to take Luke's place. He is sleeping so soundly that it +is a pity to awaken him, and the pain in my arm keeps my eyes open +very wide." + +"But I haven't been here two hours yet." + +"Nearly half that time has passed since you came on duty, and there +is no reason why you should remain awake when it's impossible for me +to sleep. I can keep a sharp watch." + +"So you can, Sue; but it is my place to take the biggest end, and I +don't fancy the idea of letting a woman do my work." + +"If I could go to sleep it would be different; but since I can't, I +shall stay here, therefore you might as well take advantage of the +opportunity." + +Mark made no move toward leaving the platform, from which he could +have a full view of the harbor, and, seeing that he was not disposed +to act upon her suggestion, Susan clambered up beside him. + +"Now tell me what you meant by saying that the next time they come +the Indians will get inside the fence?" + +"There's no sense in talking about that. I didn't count on speaking +aloud." + +"You did, however, and now it will be treating me no more than +fairly if you tell me exactly what is in your mind." + +Mark had no desire to discuss the situation just then, when it +looked very dark to him, and, in order to avoid answering the +question, he proposed to take advantage of Susan's proposition. + +"Since you are determined to stay here, I may as well get what sleep +I can. Call Luke when you are tired," He said, and before she could +detain him he had slipped down from the improvised platform, walking +rapidly toward the dwelling. + +The girl could do guard duty as well as either of her cousins, and +was eager to perform a full share of the labor devolving upon those +who were striving to hold the savages in check. Perhaps she +magnified the pain of her wound in order to be allowed to take +Mark's place, and, if such was the case, the defence would be in no +wise weakened through her. + +Until the first faint light of a new day could be seen did Susan +Harding stand on the narrow platform, watching eagerly for any signs +of life from the harbor island, and unable to change her position, +save by taking two or three paces to the right or left. Even then +she would have remained on duty longer, but that Mark came hurriedly +out of the house crying, angrily: + +"It was not fair for you to stay on watch all night, Sue! You the +same as promised to call Luke when you were tired." + +"I didn't really agree, and I'm not tired yet. There's no need of +your coming up here, for now that it is daylight, Ellen can be +trusted to keep a lookout over the island." + +"When she has eaten her breakfast I will let her take my place," +Mark replied, as he literally forced the girl to descend, and a few +moments later all the occupants of the stockade were astir. + +The cows were milked, but kept within the enclosure, the young boys +feeding and watering them. The hens were allowed to stray here or +there at will, and, save for the sentinels on the palisade, one +might have thought that the scene presented there represented +perfect peace and happiness. + +When the morning meal had been prepared, Ellen Harding took Mark's +station on the stockade, being enjoined by him to keep her eyes +fixed constantly on the harbor island, without heeding what might be +happening around her, as the little company gathered in the +Pemberton house, where thanks were given for their preservation +during the night. + +While breakfast was in progress no reference was made to the danger +which menaced; it seemed as if the women feared to alarm the younger +children, and the three to whom the defence of the island had been +committed were not desirous of starting a conversation which might +lead up to the possibilities of the future. + +Susan was forced to submit to a second treatment of her wound, as +soon as the meal had had come to an end, and Mistress Harding +peremptorily insisted on her going to bed, since she had not closed +her eyes in slumber during the night just passed. + +Mistress Pemberton set about melting lead for bullets, the store of +missiles being smaller than that of powder, and Mark and Luke went +out to make a more thorough examination of the palisade. + +"It isn't very likely that the Abenakis will make any move during +this day," the elder lad said, "and while Ellen is standing watch it +would be wicked to lose any chance of making our position yet more +secure." + +Luke was ready to act upon his brother's suggestion, but appeared to +have no desire for conversation, and Mark did not urge him to talk, +for the same reason that had caused him to hold his peace during the +breakfast hour. + +There was much that had been overlooked during the hurry and +excitement of the previous day, which could be done to strengthen +the palisade, as, for example, driving stakes at the foot of such +posts as were not standing firmly, and securing the tops of others +with braces on the inside. + +In order to do a portion of this work, it was necessary the lads +should go into the thicket for material; but while Ellen remained on +watch to give the alarm, in case she saw any signs of life on the +harbor island, they did not hesitate to leave the stockade. + +It was while they were chopping down small trees in the rear of the +dwellings, that the flock of fourteen sheep came in sight, and these +Mark decided to drive into the enclosure. + +It would be a serious blow to the settlers if these wool-growers +should be killed by the enemy, for it might be a difficult task to +replace them, and without the fleeces each summer the children would +be destitute of materials for clothing. + +By catching the leader of the flock, and dragging him along by the +horns, the lads had little trouble in getting the animals within the +stockade, and Mark announced his success by saying, in a tone of +mild triumph: + +"The family is all behind one fence now, and unless the Abenakis get +inside, they can't do us a great deal of harm." + +"But the sheep will pull heavily on our store of hay," Luke +suggested, and his brother replied, cheerily: + +"They can pick up a good bit around the place, and it won't do any +very great harm to let them go hungry now and then. It's better than +taking good chances of losing the whole drove." + +There was no further discussion as to the advisability of bringing +the sheep into the stockade, for at that moment a cry from Ellen +caused both the boys to run, with all speed, to her side. + +"Look! Look! A vessel! It must be that fishermen are coming here, +and now the Indians will be driven away!" + +[Illustration: "Look! Look! A vessel!"] + +To their great surprise and delight, the boys saw a small schooner, +coming as if from the mainland on the northward, heading directly +for the harbor island. + +"We're saved, God be thanked!" Mark cried, in a tone so loud as to +be heard by the inmates of the house, all of whom came swiftly +toward him to learn the cause of the fervent exclamation. + +"What is it, my son?" Mistress Pemberton asked, sharply, and Luke +shouted, as he pointed seaward: + +"A fishing-vessel, mother, and those on board must soon know that +the Indians are besieging us!" + +"But she appears to be going directly to the harbor island! The crew +should be warned, lest the Abenakis make an attack upon them!" + +This possibility had not entered Mark's mind; but while his mother +was yet speaking he darted out of the stockade, running with all +speed to the shore, waving his arms and shouting, to attract the +attention of the newcomers. + +He was followed by the two families, including Susan, who had been +awakened by the joyful cries, and the little party ran swiftly along +the beach until they were come to the nearest point of the island, +which was the small bluff, or incline, on the westernmost end. + +Here it was possible to have in view the schooner's deck, and that +their signals had been seen seemed positive, although no attention +was taken of them. + +"Had you not better pull out in the small boat?" Mistress Pemberton +asked of Mark, when the strangers failed to pay any heed to the +gestures of warning. "It would be dreadful if the men went on shore +and were murdered!" + +There seemed to be no reason why the lads should not visit the +vessel, and, in fact, such an idea had entered Mark's mind before +his mother spoke, but yet he hesitated to act upon her suggestion, +although it would have been impossible for him to explain why he +remained idle. + +"The schooner carries a big crew for a fisherman," Susan said, +thoughtfully. "There must be as many as twenty-five or thirty on her +deck." + +"She's no fisherman!" Mark cried, becoming perplexed as he observed +the truth of what Susan had said. "So many people never could work +on a craft of that size." + +"But what else can she be?" Luke asked, curiously, "I don't know as +it makes much difference to us, though, so long as she carries a +crew of white people. Why don't we pull out to her, Mark? Look, +she's coming to anchor, and if her crew lands without knowing of the +Abenakis, they will all be killed!" + +"There are the Indians!" Susan cried, as three canoes, filled with +savages, were seen putting out from the shore. + +"They are going to make an attack on the vessel, and we can do +nothing to help the poor people!" Mistress Pemberton cried, in an +agony of grief, while an expression of terror overspread Mark's face +as he began to have an inkling of the true situation. + +"Can't you boys do something to aid the men?" Mistress Harding +asked, and Mark replied: + +"It isn't likely they're needing any help. Those on the vessel +outnumber the Abenakis three to one, and I'm afraid they won't have +any trouble in taking care of themselves." + +No one save Susan gave any particular heed to Mark's words, but +watched with feverish interest as the canoes approached the vessel, +and then, when the Indians clambered aboard without any attempt +being made to prevent them, the expression of the face of the +spectators changed from that of sympathy to perplexity. + +"The Abenakis seem to know the fishermen," Mistress Pemberton said +to herself, and Mark replied, bitterly: + +"Ay, mother, that they do, and now, instead of being called upon to +defend ourselves against Indians only, we shall have that crowd of +Frenchmen against us!" + +"God forbid that white people could attack women and children!" +Mistress Harding cried fervently, and Mark added: + +"He hasn't forbidden it so far, aunt. Don't you remember what father +and uncle heard from those aboard of the last vessel they spoke +with? They were told that when Master Peabody and his wife were +murdered, there were ten French soldiers with the Indians." + +"Can it be that they have come to aid the savages against us?" and +Mistress Harding's face grew pale. + +"Ay, that is the way the French king fights us in this country, and +if we are murdered it will be because his agents have decided upon +it in revenge for that which was done here so many years ago to the +missionaries!" + +And now while the little party of besieged stands on the shore +facing this new and unexpected peril, suppose we set down that +which Mr. Williamson wrote in his "History of Maine." + +"A communication was received at Boston in August, 1758, from +Brigadier-General Monkton, stationed in Nova Scotia, which stated +that a body of Frenchmen, in conjunction with the Indians of the +rivers St. John, Penobscot, and probably Passamaquoddy, were +meditating an attempt upon the fort at St. Georges, and the +destruction of all the settlements on the coast." + +"Immediately Governor Pownal collected such a military force as was +at command, and embarked with them on board the King George, and the +sloop Massachusetts. Arriving, he threw these auxiliaries with some +warlike stores into the fort at a most fortunate juncture; for +within thirty-six hours after the departure the fort was actually +assailed by a body of four hundred French and Indians." + +"But so well prepared was the garrison to receive them, that they +were unable to make the least impression. Nor did any +representations of their numbers, nor any threats, communicated to +the fort by a captive woman, whom they purposely permitted to escape +hither, occasion the least alarm. Hence, the besiegers gave vent to +their resentiments and rage by killing the neighboring cattle, about +sixty of which they shot or butchered." + +It was well for the little families who were so sorely beset that +they remained in ignorance of what the French assisted by the +Indians of several tribes, were trying to do, otherwise their +despair would have been even greater than it was as they watched +the reception of the Abenakis by those on board the schooner. + +It will never be known whether this attack on Mount Desert was made +in revenge for what had been done by Argall to the French +missionaries; but certain it was that all the settlements on the +coast, large or small, had been marked for destruction under the +guise of legitimate warfare. + +During five minutes or more, while the besieged watched the +movements on the deck of the schooner until there was no longer any +question but that the number of their enemies had been largely +increased, not a word was spoken, and then Mistress Harding broke +the painful stillness by exclaiming: + +"There is nothing left us to do but submit! With French soldiers at +hand, it is not probable the savages will be allowed to murder their +prisoners, and to surrender the island is better than being killed!" + +"The French have never done anything toward preventing the Indians +from working their will on the helpless captives. Do you remember +the story father tells of Falmouth, when these same Frenchmen +pledged their words of honor that no blood should be spilled, and +yet many of those who surrendered were murdered in cold blood?" + +"But what other can we do save give ourselves up?" Mistress Harding +cried, helplessly, and Susan stepped proudly by the side of Mark, as +he replied, stoutly: + +"We can fight to the last, and die with muskets in our hands, +instead of going willingly to meet the scalping-knife or the +tomahawk. It may be that those on the mainland will learn what is +being done here, and come to our relief." + +"Do not put faith in such a possibility, my son. It is better to +face the worst than build on hopes which must be dashed," and +Mistress Pemberton laid her hand on Mark's shoulder as if in pride +because of the courage he displayed. "We will do battle against +these people, white and red, and when our best has been done, the +end will be no worse than if we submitted tamely." + +"That's the way to put it!" Mark cried, kissing his mother's hand. +"We had planned to defend ourselves against the savages, and now let +us see what shall be done since they have had such a large +reinforcement. Certain it is that we must not stand here, for they +may have muskets aboard the schooner which will carry a ball farther +than ours." + +Mistress Pemberton led the way back to the stockade, and there, in +the open air near the gateway where a close watch might be kept over +both the island and the vessel, she commended the little party to +the care of Him who watches over even the sparrow's fall. + +It was to the distressed company as if the entire situation had been +suddenly changed; as if their means of defence were totally +inadequate, leaving them to the mercy of the French and Indians, who +were making the attack simply because the King of England and the +King of France had sundry differences of opinion, which might be +settled by spilling the blood of innocent people. + +Susan, who had been the most courageous, seemed to have grown +timorous when she asked, while she and Mark were where the words +could not be overheard: + +"What shall we do? Is there any hope we can hold back such a force +as is being arrayed against us?" + +"It doesn't seem possible, Sue, and yet we must fight to the last, +rather than give over our mothers and you girls to what we know will +follow if we show the white feather." + +"I am not afraid of your ever doing anything of that kind, Mark," +and the girl laid her hand on his shoulder with a loving gesture. +"You will always be brave and true; but what I am asking is whether +we may do anything which, as yet, has not been tried." + +"I exhausted all my ideas in arranging for a defence against the +Abenakis, and now we must stand up like images, fighting until we +are destroyed. Anything is better than tame surrender, when we know +by the terrible experiences of others what will follow." + +"In that I am of your mind, Mark, dear; but I am asking if there +isn't something else, which, as yet, we have neglected, that can be +done. Our mothers depend on you, as do I, which is only natural, +since you are the eldest, and should of right take your father's +place." + +"It is just that, Sue dear, which causes me to be afraid of my own +ideas. If I make a mistake, it may be fatal to you all, for you will +follow my advice." + +"That is true, Mark, and yet you should not be timid because of it, +for you are best fitted to act the part of leader, and we know full +well you will only do that which seems safest." + +"Are you agreed that we cannot surrender?" and Mark asked the +question in an angry tone, as if expecting she would refuse to view +the situation in the same light he did. + +"Of course I am. Could I say otherwise after all the stories we have +heard from the mainland?" + +"Then we must fight?" + +"Of course, and to the last. I would rather see mother and the +children killed by musket-balls, than to have them fall unharmed +into the hands of those who await us there," and she motioned toward +the harbor island. "How long can we hold the stockade against such a +force?" + +"Four and twenty hours, it may be, and a much shorter time if you, +or Luke, or I should be killed early in the fight." + +"And we will hope that our fathers do not come back until all is +over." + +"Ay, Sue dear, that is what we must hope, unless we would have them +come in time to meet their death. Two more men on the stockade would +not greatly prolong the struggle, and I fail to see how they, +without other aid, could help us very much." + +"If it should be, Mark dear, that I am wounded again, will you see +to it that the Indians do not take me prisoner?" + +"Ay, Sue, though the moment will be a terrible one when I turn my +musket against you; but it shall be done." + +"And if you are left until the last you will see that the children +are not taken alive?" + +"If I am left, Sue dear, it shall be as the last of our families on +the island, for I believe death is more pleasant than can be life in +the hands of such as those who are counting soon to hold us in their +power." + +Then the two children kissed each other as if in a last farewell, +and Mark, trying to assume a careless air, said, with a feeble +attempt at a smile: + +"Since you were the last to awaken, it is no more than fair you +should be among the first on duty. You, Luke, and I will stand guard +alone until the attack is made, as we can count it will be this +night, and then our mothers must charge the muskets. Remember, Sue +dear, that I haven't yet despaired of holding the whole wicked crew +in check. It doesn't seem possible that God would withhold His hand +while we are being beaten." + +"And yet it has been that many people in this country, whose cause +was as just as ours, have been overcome by the same merciless foe +who await us." + +"Ay, Sue, and since we can only take what comes as stoutly as decent +English people should, we'll seem to be brave, however timorous our +hearts may become when the last moment is at hand." + +Then these two children, striving to fill the places of their +parents, began that vigil which both believed would be ended with +their death. + +Mark made the announcement to his mother and aunt, after the gate +had been shut and closely barred, that they and the children should +remain in the dwelling until the moment came when they could be of +assistance in loading the weapons, and in the meanwhile the task of +guarding the stockade would devolve upon his brother, cousin, and +himself. + +"We are not so much worse off than before, except that many more +will come against us," he said, as the women and children went +toward the Pemberton house. "We shall fight until the last, and, if +God is kind, it may be we can hold the villains in check four and +twenty hours, if no more. Get what rest you can, and remember that +tears are of no avail when bullets are needed." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +AN ATTACK + + +When the women and smaller children were inside the dwelling, Mark +said to his companions: + +"It is better to have something in the way of work on hand than +remain idle, and it has come into my mind that we might improve our +condition if we raised the top of the stockade so that we could +stand on the platforms without being seen by those outside." + +"How would you set about it?" Luke asked, with mild curiosity. + +"A heavy timber might be made fast to the top of the palisade, and, +by making loopholes between the upper ends of the logs, we would be +hidden from view, and at the same time be able to keep watch." + +"Do you count that we should go after logs, taking the chances that +the enemy will make a landing right away?" + +"I intend to go alone, while you and Susan stand guard. Shout if you +see a single boat putting off from the harbor island, and then I can +get inside the enclosure before the enemy will be able to paddle +over here." + +Mark did not wait to learn if his companions had any criticism to +make on his proposition, but set off in search of the axe without +delay, and the others had no choice but to mount guard. + +[Illustration: He returned with a heavy log.] + +When the lad went through the gate he directed that it be barred +behind him, lest there might be Indians in the thicket, and a few +moments later it was possible to hear the sound of his sturdy blows +as he felled the trees. + +In less than half an hour he returned with a heavy log that had been +squared on one side, and, after having been given admittance, he +laid this on the posts above the platform on which Susan was +stationed. By chopping either side of the uprights, close to the +top, he made V-shaped apertures of sufficient size to admit of a +musket-barrel being thrust through, thus forming five or six +loopholes for the sentinel. + +Therefore it was one could remain on the platform without being +exposed to view of the enemy directly in front, and such shelter +would be of great value to the defenders while the attacking party +was a short distance away. + +By means of wooden pins Mark secured the log in place, although not +very firmly, and the three children who were to defend the stockade +believed their position had been decidedly strengthened by such a +device. + +Another hour was spent in felling trees, fitting the timbers, and +putting them in place. Then Mark occupied himself with making a +careful examination of every portion of the palisade, after which, +he said, with a long-drawn sigh: + +"I can think of nothing else that is likely to improve the defences, +and it only remains to wait until the enemy is ready to begin +operations. What has been done aboard the schooner?" + +"Many of the men have gone ashore on the harbor island," Luke +replied. "The sails are furled, and everything snugged down as if +for a long stay." + +"Have you seen the Abenakis?" + +"Two or three of them yet remain aboard the schooner; but the larger +number are on shore." + +Then Mark clambered up on one of the platforms, straining his eyes +to learn what the strangers were doing with the hope of being able +to make some guess as to when another attack would be made; but in +this last he was unsuccessful. The men were lounging on the vessel, +or ashore, as if their only purpose was to pass the time pleasantly, +and utterly heedless as to whether they were seen by those inside +the stockade. + +"Whoever is in command of the Frenchmen will direct the next +assault," Mark said, sufficiently loud to be heard by his companions +at their several posts of duty. "It is known that we count on +defending ourselves, and we may expect to see the entire force +before us within the coming ten or twelve hours." + +"What about the powder?" Luke asked. + +"We have none too much; but enough, I believe, if we are careful in +making every shot count, to last us during two assaults. After that, +if we're alive, there'll be a short allowance." + +"A boat is putting off from the schooner, and heading this way," +Susan announced, and the boys gave no further heed as to +speculations regarding the future, for it seemed as if the enemy was +about to begin operations. + +In a very short time, however, it could be understood that there was +no danger of an immediate attack, for the craft coming shoreward +from the vessel was a canoe in which were but three men. + +The sentinels were unable to understand the meaning of this +movement. It did not seem probable the enemy counted on boldly +reconnoitering the island, nor was it reasonable to suppose any +attack was to be made with so small a force, and Mark said, in +perplexity: + +"I can't make out why they are coming; but we'll be ready for +whatever turn affairs may take." + +"Shall we fire on them if they get too near?" Susan asked. + +"Unless they claim to be friends, which isn't likely, we'll treat +them exactly as we would the Abenakis, if they were bold enough to +land in broad day," Mark replied, and, as assurance of his +intentions, he made certain his musket was ready for immediate use. + +The strangers paddled directly toward the spot where were kept the +boats of the settlers, beached the canoe, and straightway approached +the stockade, as friends might have done. + +The three children on guard watched the newcomers curiously, until +they were within fifty or sixty paces of the gate, and then Mark +hailed: + +"It will be safer to halt where you are until we understand the +reason for this visit," he cried, showing himself above the +palisade, with musket in hand. + +"Are you in command of the stockade?" one of the visitors asked, as +all three came to a full stop. + +"Ay, for the time being." + +"How many have you in garrison?" one of the newcomers asked, as he +advanced a single pace, to show that he was authorized to act as +spokesman for his party. + +"That is for you to find out," Mark replied, with a smile. "You must +take us for simples, if it is in your mind that we will give all the +information demanded." + +"I did not ask to gain information, for we know exactly the number +of women and children here. I desired that you yourself should state +it in order to the better understand how entirely you are at our +mercy," The man said, and his manner of speech told that he was +French. + +"I do not need to repeat it, having seen your force, and knowing my +own full well." + +"Then you can understand that when I offer good quarter if you +surrender without resistance, it should do away with any necessity +for a conflict." + +"Are you ready to give the same quarter your people promised at +Falmouth, when the defenceless prisoners were murdered by you +Frenchmen?" Mark cried, angrily. + +"I give you my word of honor as a soldier, than no one shall be +harmed if you surrender this place immediately," the officer +replied, sharply. + +"If I have heard rightly, the Baron de Castine gave the same pledge +at Falmouth, and afterward excused himself by saying that he could +not restrain the Indian allies," Mark said, stoutly. "Since then it +is difficult to believe that French officers have any too much +honor; otherwise, perhaps, they would not fight side by side with +savages." + +"Do you refuse to surrender?" the visitor asked, angrily. + +[Illustration: "Do you refuse to surrender?"] + +"Ay, that I do, and all here are of the same mind with me. It is +better to die fighting than be put to the torture by your allies, +whom, mayhap, you could not restrain." + +"My force is so large that you will be crushed in a twinkling, and, +if you resist, no mercy may be expected. I have come in the effort +to save your lives." + +"Why should it be necessary?" Mark asked. "What have we done that +you strive to take possession of our homes?" + +"That is not a question to be discussed," the officer replied, +impatiently. "It is my intention to clear this island of settlers, +and I hope at such time to aid you." + +"It is a brave piece of business to wait until our fathers have gone +away, and then come here to fight women and children!" Susan cried, +sharply. "Are all French officers so valiant?" + +It was impossible for the visitor to see the speaker; but he knew +from the voice that the words were uttered by a girl, and his face +reddened, as he bit his lip to hold back a retort. + +"I offer you good quarter, and to that pledge my word, if you submit +at once," he said, after a brief pause. "In case you are so foolish +as to dream of holding out against us, much loss of blood must +ensue." + +"That is bound to come," Mark replied, gravely. "We are resolved to +hold this stockade as long as there is one left alive to fire a +musket, and when you succeed in the noble work of murdering women +and children, there will be none left alive for the savages, your +very good friends, to torture." + +"And that is your last word?" the officer asked, half-turning on his +heel. + +"The last," Mark replied. + +The Frenchman stood irresolutely while one might have counted ten, +and then, wheeling about, he marched toward the shore, looking back +from time to time as if believing the young defenders might repent +of having given such an answer. + +"We have shut off all chance of making a bargain with them," Luke +said, half to himself, and Susan replied, stoutly: + +"It would have shamed me had Mark treated with them! Why should they +offer us quarter? We have done nothing to warrant their making an +attack upon us, and it is well they should hear the truth--that it +is nothing less than murder. People don't make war in such a fashion +as this!" + +Mark gave no heed to what his companions were saying. His eyes were +fixed on the canoe, in which the three men had embarked, and it was +in his mind that when they regained the schooner there would be a +decided change in the position of affairs. + +And in this he was not mistaken; within half an hour the boats +belonging to the schooner, and the canoes of the Indians, were +engaged in transporting the men to the shore of Mount Desert, half a +mile or more north of the stockade. + +"There's one satisfaction to be had in arousing the Frenchman's +temper," Mark said, grimly, when the work of disembarkation was well +under way. "We won't need to expect a night attack, and hang around +in suspense waiting for it, because the assault is to be begun some +time before sunset. We had best get out our supply of ammunition, +and warn the others that they will soon be needed." + +It was Susan who went to summon her mother and aunt, and when she +returned, carrying a heavy burden of powder and bullets, it was to +report: + +"The children are to be kept in the house, under charge of Ellen. +The others will be here in a minute or two." + +"They can't come any too soon," Luke said, nervously. "The Frenchmen +are already marching along the shore, with the Abenakis trailing on +behind." + +Susan was at her post of duty in a twinkling, and, looking out +through the rough loopholes, she saw no less than twenty white men, +ten of whom were armed with muskets, and the others carrying pikes, +the head of which glittered in the sun, marching in soldierly array +down the beach. In their rear slouched nine Indians, and it was safe +to assume that the remainder of the red-skinned party had been +disabled during the first assault. + +It was a positive relief to Mark when he saw that the enemy was +intending to march directly upon the stockade, most likely counting +on carrying the place by the first assault. If the force had been +divided, so that a portion might attack from the rear at the same +time the others were in front, the task of holding them in check +would have been well-nigh hopeless. + +Even as it was, with everything in the children's favor, it did not +seem possible they could defend themselves against such a force; but +Mark said, as if believing the chances for success were very good: + +"Remember that we can't afford to waste any bullets. If each of us +could hit the target three times in succession, I warrant you those +valiant Frenchmen would be eager to gain the shelter of their +vessel. Both of you can strike four squirrels out of five at fifty +paces, and surely you should be able to do as well when the mark is +so much larger and moving slowly. Don't shoot until you are certain +of hitting your man, and we'll soon see those fellow's backs." + +Mistress Pemberton and Mistress Harding had come to do their share +in the one-sided battle. Both the women looked pale and distressed, +as was but natural under the desperate circumstances; but a single +glance at their faces would have told that they believed the only +course to be a stout resistance, even though it should cost the +lives of all. + +At the shore, directly in front of the stockade, the Indians forced +a halt of the white men, by seemingly insisting that some other +method of procedure be adopted, and during two or three minutes it +appeared as if they would carry their point. + +Mark drew a long breath of relief, however, when the officer who had +demanded the surrender pushed his way past the savages with a +threatening gesture, as he ordered the men forward again. + +"They are coming straight on in a body," he said, in a low tone. +"When you are certain of hitting the mark, shoot, and have the +second musket where it can be got at quickly. If we could get in six +fair shots at the start, it would be a big advantage." + +Each of the children on the platforms had two muskets loaded, and +the women stood ready to take every weapon as soon as it was empty. +The ammunition, divided into three portions, was near the +sharpshooters, and nothing remained to be done save take part in the +life or death struggle so near at hand. + +Steadily the French marched toward the stockade, evidently intending +to begin the attack near the gate, and it was Susan who fired the +first shot. + +As the report of her musket rang out, one of the foremost men +plunged forward to the ground, and five seconds later Mark brought +another of the enemy down. + +Luke fired, but failed of doing execution. He seized the second +musket hurriedly, however, and crippled his foe, thus doing half as +much as Mark had required. + +"Three down in four shots isn't so bad!" the leader cried, +encouragingly, and the words were hardly more than spoken before +both he and Susan fired the second time, each of the bullets finding +its billet. + +Now it was that the Frenchmen halted without the word of command, +and opened fire. + +During three or four minutes it was as if a perfect hail-storm of +lead raged around the stockade, but the stout logs afforded good +protection. Never a missile found its way inside, and the spirits of +the besieged rose rapidly. + +Acting under Mark's orders, neither Susan nor Luke had attempted to +make reply to the furious shooting, lest a bullet accidentally come +through one of the loopholes, and when, because their weapons were +empty, the soldiers ceased the aimless firing, the children's +muskets had been recharged. + +"If we can do as well as we did before, those fellows will soon show +their backs!" Mark cried, cheerily, himself setting the example by +wounding the officer. + +Now the bullets came thick and fast during a full minute, and then +the foremost of the assailants began to fall back, carrying the +officer with them, and an instant later the entire party was in full +and disorderly retreat. + +Three children had actually beaten back twenty white men and nine +Indians, without having received a scratch! + +Not until the faint-hearted men were at the water's edge, beyond +range of those in the stockade, was a halt made, and then it +appeared as if they were holding a council of war. + +[Illustration: An instant later the entire party was in retreat.] + +The officer was laid in one of the boats, and the soldiers gathered +around him, the able-bodied gesticulating furiously, and the wounded +seated on the sand attending to their injuries. None had been killed +outright, but the majority of those who had been hit would not be +likely to take part in another attack, unless it was delayed for a +considerable time. + +It seemed as if the white men gave but little attention to what the +Indians said during this council, for the savages were shouldered +aside with scant ceremony, and after a few moments all the Abenakis, +for none had been wounded, stalked gravely southward, where they +were soon lost to view amid the bushes. + +"We're going to have trouble from those fellows, and it won't be +long coming," Mark said, as he leaped down from the platform, and +ran toward that portion of the stockade immediately in the rear of +the dwellings. "Keep a sharp watch over the Frenchmen, and let me +know what they are doing!" + +Then he began putting up a platform at that point where he could +overlook the thicket, which last had been allowed to grow +dangerously near the buildings, and had hardly mounted for the +purpose of making a hasty survey, when a bullet imbedded itself in +one of the posts against which he leaned. + +"What is the matter?" Susan cried. + +"The Abenakis have sneaked around here, where they can shoot while +remaining under cover. Let mother come to load my muskets!" + +The report of Mark's weapon followed the words, and from the thicket +two or three muskets were discharged, thus showing that the entire +force of Indians was lurking amid the underbrush. + +Susan came running toward her cousin, carrying a weapon in each +hand, and the latter asked, sharply: + +"Why have you left your post? The Abenakis won't kick up much of a +row until after dark." + +"There is nothing to be done at the other side," Susan replied, as +she set about dragging two or three lobster-pots toward the +palisade. "The Frenchmen are paddling back to the schooner, not +leaving one behind, and Luke is watching to see when they leave the +vessel again." + +Another bullet from the Thicket whistled uncomfortably near Mark's +head, and he understood that the most dangerous portion of the +attack was now to be met, for it was impossible to see a single foe. +The swaying of the branches or the tiny curls of smoke, were the +only tokens of an enemy, save when a weapon was discharged. + +"Keep down under cover!" Mark cried, when Susan would have mounted +the collection of lobster-pots. "They are shooting close, and if you +should be disabled we would be in even worse trouble than we are +now." + +"But you are showing them a target." + +"Some one must be here to hold them back." + +"Then I have the same right as you," and the courageous girl +clambered up on the shaky platform until it was possible for her to +look over the palisade. + +It was a most dangerous position, and, fearing lest she should be +killed, Mark left his station to chop away the ends of the posts to +make loopholes. + +"Now you can have a view of the woods without showing yourself," he +said, and would have gone back to his previous position, exposed +though it was, but that she stopped him by asking: + +"Will you do the same at your end of the fence as you have here?" + +"There isn't so much need for me to keep under cover." + +"There is ten times more reason why you should be careful than for +me to skulk behind the posts. Unless you hew the timbers at your +station as you have these, I shall change places with you." + +Mistress Pemberton added her commands to Susan's entreaties, with +the result that Mark was forced to protect himself so far as +possible, but while he chopped at the posts half a dozen bullets +struck close around the axe, showing that the Indians were on the +alert. + +When half an hour had passed neither Mark nor Susan had seen one of +their enemies. Several times they fired at the places where the +branches were waving as if some person was walking beneath them; but +no cry of pain was heard to tell that the bullet had taken effect. + +During this time Luke had reported more than once that the Frenchmen +yet remained on board their vessel, and when the sun was sinking +behind the hills Mark said to his cousin: + +"We're wasting too much powder and lead, Sue. I don't believe one of +our bullets has gone home, and we have sent far too many at random. +The Frenchmen are not beaten yet, and we must have plenty of +ammunition when they come again." + +"What, then, are we to do?" + +"I will stay here, keeping guard lest the Abenakis attempt to scale +the fence. You and our mothers shall attend to the household duties, +holding yourselves in readiness to come whenever I shout." + +"But there is nothing for me to do in the house." + +"Then take advantage of the opportunity to get a little rest, for +it is certain that we shall have our hands full during all this +night. Get supper, if nothing more, and then bring me something to +drink." + +"I'll do that first, and then look after myself," Susan said, as she +went toward the house, and a moment later Mark heard from her a cry +of distress. + +"What's the matter?" he shouted, wildly, fearing, for the instant, +that some of the savages had gained entrance to the dwelling despite +his careful watch. + +"The water! The water!" Susan cried, mournfully, and then came a hum +of voices raised high in excitement and fear, amid which the +sentinel could distinguish no words. + +"Come here, Susan!" Mark shouted, peremptorily, and as the girl +appeared he demanded, "Now tell me what has gone wrong?" + +"The children have spilled all the water we took into the house, and +there's not a drop to be had!" + +"But they couldn't have carried the spring away," Mark replied, with +a laugh, able to make merry even amid the terrible surroundings, so +great was his relief at learning that nothing more serious had +caused the cry which startled him. + +"The sheep have gathered there, until the entire place is a mass of +filthy mud." + +"Well, well, don't let that distress you so sorely. We'll soon be +able to clear it out, for I reckon these beggarly Abenakis won't +keep me busy more than twelve hours." + +"But if the Frenchmen should come in the meantime?" + +"We'll take our chances of that, and get along without water a +little while." + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +FIRE + + +Mark was disposed to make light of that which distressed Susan, and +thus did he make his first mistake in the defence. + +To his mind there was nothing very serious in the loss of the water +which had been carried into the dwelling, because the spring was +within the stockade, and however much mischief the sheep had done, +it would be the work of but few moments to put everything in proper +order once more. + +The chief thought in his mind was regarding the possible trouble +which the Abenakis might make while hidden in the thicket back of +the palisade, and, after this, the fear that the ablest of his +assistants might become disabled because of her wound, which had not +received the attention such an injury required. + +Therefore it was he said to Susan speaking almost sharply to the end +that she might feel forced to obey without argument: + +"The first thing for you to look after is that wound. Have your +mother dress it once more while you can be spared from the +palisade." Then, seeing that she hesitated, he added, "It is +necessary for the safety of all that you look after yourself, +because if you were disabled, we would be in most serious plight, +you being the best marksman among us." + +Susan hesitated no longer; but went toward the house, even though +she did not believe it necessary to give very much attention to her +arm, which was not so badly injured but that she could use it with +comparative ease. + +When she had disappeared within the dwelling, Mark, watching through +the loophole for a target, cried to his brother: + +"How is everything over your way, Luke?" + +"There has been no change. The Frenchmen are sticking close to their +vessel." + +"I reckon it would be safe for you to come here a few minutes. I'll +send Mary to take your place." + +The lad obeyed promptly, and, after cautioning him not to expose +himself to the aim of the enemy, although it was essential he keep +close lookout over the thicket, Mark went toward the spring. + +The damage done by the sheep was greater than he had supposed. The +earth in the immediate vicinity had been ploughed up by the feet of +the animals until the spring was nearly choked, and Mark realized +that a full hour's work would be required to repair the mischief. + +"We can't spend much time at it while the Abenakis are in the +woods," he said to himself. "Later in the might, perhaps, I shall +have a chance to do the job." + +Then he went to where Mary was taking Luke's place as sentinel near +the gate, instructing her to raise an alarm immediately she saw any +movement on the part of the Frenchmen. + +"Keep your eyes open wide," he said, "and, while watching the +schooner, give some attention to what may be going on close at hand. +I don't believe the Indians will come out of the thicket to show +themselves where no shelter can be found. But, at the same time, it +is possible. Remember that all our lives might pay the forfeit of +your carelessness." + +"You can trust me as you do Susan, although I can't shoot so well; +but my eyes are as good as hers." + +"True for you, sister mine, and between now and morning I'm counting +on your doing a full share of standing guard." + +Then Mark ascended the platform for one look at the vessel, which +remained at her moorings with but few men showing on deck, after +which he went into the dwelling, where his mother was preparing +supper. + +Susan's arm was being rebandaged, after having been bound up with +simples which had been gathered in the woods against just such an +emergency, and the smaller children were huddled in one corner like +frightened sheep. + +"I have left Luke in my place," the lad said, in reply to his +mother's question. "The Abenakis are taking good care to keep out of +sight, and it is only a waste of ammunition to fire at a waving bush +or curl of smoke. I'll get something to eat, now that I'm here, and +then go on duty again." + +Susan declared she would stand watch near the gate, in order that +Mary might take care of the children, and to that end ate supper +with Mark, after which the two went out to their weary, dangerous +vigil once more, with the disheartening knowledge that there was no +probability of receiving aid from any quarter. + +[Illustration: Susan's arm was being rebandaged.] + +"We won't talk about it, Sue," Mark said, when his cousin bewailed +the fact that even though a fishing-vessel should pass near at hand, +her crew would not come ashore when it was seen that the _Future +Hopes_ had left her anchorage. "We can't afford to look on the dark +side of affairs, lest we grow faint-hearted, for you know that, once +our courage is gone, we are the same as beaten." + +Susan did not reply, as she might have done with truth, that they +were then very nearly in that deplorable condition; but shut her +teeth tightly as if to prevent the escape of a single word, while +she walked rapidly toward the gate to take her station as sentinel. + +Mary begged to stand guard an hour or two longer; but Susan insisted +that she was needed in the house, and reluctantly the girl descended +from the platform. + +Then Mark relieved Luke from duty, instructing him to first get his +supper, and then, if the Indians remained inactive, to set about +cleaning out the spring. + +By this time the night had fully come, and Mark noted with +apprehension that clouds were gathering in the sky. While the moon +shone brightly it was as easy to guard against surprise as at +noonday; but once that light was obscured, the enemy might creep up +at a dozen places on the palisade without being detected. + +"Two hours of blackness, and we are done for," Mark said to himself, +with a sigh, and then, remembering what he had told Susan, he added, +"We've got to take whatever comes, and the only manly way is to make +the best of it. In case it is very dark to-night, Mary and Ellen +must both stand watch with the rest of us." + +The report of a musket interrupted his train of gloomy thoughts, and +involuntarily he ducked his head when a bullet came singing over the +fence so near that he felt the "wind" of it. + +"You can't tempt me to shoot till I see something to fire at," he +said, grimly, watching through the loophole at the underbrush which +was merged by the shadows into one single mass of gloom, amid which +not even a movement among the branches could be distinguished. + +Two more shots, which caused him to wonder why the Abenakis were +growing so active, and then he caught a glimpse of a faint spark in +the thicket, which at first sight appeared to him like the glow from +an Indian's pipe. + +He had raised his musket, intending to fire at the bright spot, when +it suddenly increased in size, and, while he stood speculating as to +what it could be, a long tongue of flame leaped upward from branch +to branch. + +No need for speculation now, nor was it well that he stand very much +longer on guard, for the terrible truth was all to plain. + +The Abenakis had fired the woods, counting on burning the palisade, +and thus giving them free entrance for the bloody business upon +which they had come. + +His first thought was to run for water, and then, even before he +could make a movement toward the spring, came the realization that +it was impossible to effect anything by such a course. + +He would not be able to throw water upon the fire in the thicket, +even though he exposed himself to full view over the top of the +palisade, and this was probably exactly what the Indians hoped he +might do. + +"It begins to look as if we had about come to an end of the defence, +and that nothing remains but to sell our lives as dearly as +possible," he said, gloomily, to himself. "Everything around here is +as dry as it well can be, and once the fire gains headway, even the +houses must go." + +Mark descended doggedly from the platform, and as he did so Susan +cried, from her post of duty near the gate: + +"What is on fire?" + +"The Abenakis have started a blaze in the woods." + +"Will the fence burn, think you?" + +"Ay, when the fire is well under way." + +"Can't we do anything toward putting out the blaze?" + +"Nothing, unless we want the Indians to shoot us down before we can +fire a shot." + +"Then what is to be done?" and in her distress Susan leaped down +from the platform to approach her cousin. + +"Better stay where you are!" the lad cried, warningly. "I don't +suppose it will make any great difference to us, and yet we should +know if the Frenchmen come ashore after seeing the fire." + +The girl returned immediately to her station, and even though he was +at a considerable distance from her, Mark could hear the choking sob +which escaped her lips. + +"Keep up a stout heart, Sue; we can make a last stand inside the +house." + +"Ay, Mark; but it will be the last!" + +The lad made no reply; he stood at some distance from the palisade +as if trying to decide upon a course of action, and while he thus +remained irresolute his mother came from the house. + +There was no need that she ask for information; the blaze was so +bright by this time that it must have been seen by those on the +vessel, and Mistress Pemberton inquired in a low tone, but with no +tremor in her voice: + +"Are the logs dry?" + +"Ay, mother; but it will be some time before the flames can eat in +very deeply. We've got fifteen or twenty minutes yet." + +"What is to be done?" + +"We'll take refuge in the house, and shoot down as many as possible +before the fire drives us out." + +"If there is nothing more before us, why not come inside now? The +Indians can climb up on the posts on either side and shoot you down +while you stand here in the light." + +"The Frenchmen are coming ashore!" Susan cried. "One boat-load has +pushed off already!" + +"We are going into the house," Mark said, hesitatingly, as if, even +now, when prudence demanded that they should seek shelter as soon as +possible, he was questioning whether he might effect something by +remaining in the open. + +"But if we don't stand guard the Indians will soon be over the +fence," the girl cried, nervously. + +"Ay, and if you stand there in the glow of the fire they can creep +up under cover of the shadows to one side or the other, and shoot +you down. We've done all we can here, Sue, and the remainder of our +fight must be made from the house." + +The report of a musket from the southern side of the stockade, and +the humming of a bullet close beside Susan's head, gave emphasis to +the lad's words, causing the sentinel to obey without further parley. + +Once inside the dwelling, with the door strongly barred, the older +members of the little party strove to appear unconcerned, each +hoping to cheer the other, and at no time since the island was +besieged did they display more courage than now, when there seemed +no ray of hope remaining. + +Through the crevices of the logs and the window-shutters could be +seen the glow of the flames, which were increasing each instant, +fanned as they were by short, furious gusts of wind which came from +the gathering clouds. + +"We must get under the roof, where I made the loopholes," Mark said +to Susan and Luke. "There's no question but that the Indians will +make a try at coming over the stockade before the fire has destroyed +it, else they have changed their natures completely, and we won't +give them full swing, even though we are cooped up here like rats in +a trap." + +"The boys want water," Ellen, who had been attending to the younger +children, said, at this moment, and the elders of the party looked +at each other in dismay. + +The new danger which confronted them had driven, for the time being, +everything else from their minds; but now all realized that, even +though they might not be permitted to remain long in that frail +refuge, they would suffer severely from thirst before the end came. + +"Get into the loft, one on each side, and shoot with good aim if you +see a painted face over the fence!" Mark cried, as he took up one of +the buckets and went swiftly toward the door. + +"You must not go out!" his mother said, as she barred the way. "It +is certain by this time that the Abenakis are where they can have a +view of the enclosure, and you will be shot down. Better that the +children should suffer from thirst." + +"We will all soon be needing something to drink, for it's bound to +be hot inside here when the palisade catches fire. One bucketful of +water will save us a good deal of suffering, and I'm bound to take +the chances." + +Then, before his mother could prevent him, Mark opened the door, +running at full speed to the spring, which was not more than twenty +feet distant. + +That the Abenakis were on the alert could be told when half a dozen +shots were fired in rapid succession; but, fortunately for the +defenders of the island, not a bullet took effect, owing to Mark's +rapid movements. + +To those who were watching him in agonizing suspense from the house, +it seemed as if the lad no more than wheeled about when he gained +the spring, and then came toward the building in a zigzag course, +well calculated to confuse the most skilful marksman. + +[Illustration: He reëntered the house with a bucket two-thirds full +of muddy water.] + +He reëntered the house with a bucket two-thirds full of muddy water, +and, while barring the door, once more said, in a tone of triumph: + +"I reckoned it might be done if a fellow used his legs well. That +stuff doesn't look fit to drink; but after the mud has settled a bit +it will be better than nothing. I am to blame for not cleaning the +spring out when I first knew that the children had wasted the +supply." + +"You have nothing with which to reproach yourself, Mark," his aunt +said as she laid her hand affectionately on his shoulder. "You have +taken the place of both your father and uncle, and there is not a +man grown who could have done more, or better, work." + +The lad's face flushed with pleasure at this praise, but he affected +to give no heed to the words as he clambered into the loft, musket +in hand, calling out when he was on the timbers above: + +"Give us the ammunition up here, and we'll load our own guns until +the enemy comes too fast." + +Mistress Pemberton handed him only a portion of the powder and +bullets, after which she stood on the top of a table ready to take +the empty weapons when the sharpshooters required her services. + +Mark was the first to discharge his musket, and a cry of pain +followed the report, telling that the ammunition had not been wasted. + +"What did you see?" his mother asked, anxiously. + +"An Indian's head over the top of the fence near the gate. There's +one villain the less to trouble us!" + +At this moment Susan and Luke both fired, the reports coming so near +together as to sound like one, and the girl cried, triumphantly: + +"I've hit another! What did you do, Luke?" + +"I don't know; he went backward at the flash, like a loon; but it +seems as if I must have struck him, for I had a fair aim." + +Mistress Pemberton now had work to perform, for those in the loft +soon learned that it would be impossible to recharge the weapons and +at the same time keep close watch on what might be happening outside. + +Seven shots had been fired from the dwelling, three of which were +known to have found their targets, when a heavy pounding at the gate +told of additional danger. + +"What is it?" Mistress Harding cried, and Mark replied, quietly, as +if it was of no especial consequence: + +"The Frenchmen have come, and are battering down the gate." + +"How long will it take them to do it?" Susan asked, her voice +quivering despite all efforts to render it steady. + +"It will be a good half-hour's job, with what timber they can pick +up near at hand. If they should cut down a stout tree, the work +might be done in half that time. Keep your eyes on the top of the +fence, for if one fellow gets inside he might succeed in pulling out +the bars before we could stop him." + +Twice more the children fired, and then it was as if the Abenakis +had tired of a game at which they were rapidly being worsted without +an opportunity to inflict any injury. + +"They've made up their minds to wait till the gate is down," Mark +said, grimly. "We must have all the muskets ready when the rush +comes, and shoot with good aim, for it will be our last fair chance." + +All this while the flames had been increasing in volume, and the +heat inside the dwelling, filled with the smoke of burning powder as +it was, seemed stifling. + +The younger children had drank of the muddy water eagerly, giving no +heed to its disagreeable appearance, and the older members of the +little company were already suffering with thirst; but never one of +them ventured to claim a portion of the scanty supply. + +"The fence is on fire," Mark said as he left his station at the +front of the loft to survey the scene in the rear. "The wind is +getting up in great shape, and coming from the east, otherwise these +housed would be on fire by this time." + +"There goes the upper part of the gate!" Luke cried. "Two or three +more fair blows, and the whole will be down!" + +Mark came back to where he could overlook the scene of what he +believed would be the final struggle, and the three children +crouched, muskets in hand, ready to empty the six weapons before the +enemy could approach the house sufficiently near to find shelter +under its walls. + +The two women were standing on a table, where they could reach the +weapons when they were empty. In one corner of the room, seated on a +bed which was laid on the floor behind the barricade of the door, +were the other children, some crying for water, and others weeping +with fear. + +The powder smoke hung heavily in the small apartment, which was +illumined by the glow of the flames, now not more than thirty feet +distant, and the heat was almost overpowering. + +The bucket in which Mark had brought the muddy water from the +spring, was empty, and the throats of the three children in the loft +were literally parched with a thirst that could not be allayed. + +They were beset by danger on every hand, and the supreme moment +seemed very near, for once the gate was demolished, however +desperately they might fight, the end was come. + +"We are not to leave here alive," Susan whispered softly in Mark's +ear, and he replied, pressing her hand: + +"That part of it sha'n't be forgotten, Sue dear." + +A cry from Luke; the crashing and splintering of wood; a shock which +could be felt by the refugees as the heavy timbers fell inward, and +the passage was open to the foe. + +"Take good aim!" Mark shouted. "Shoot at the foremost, and work +quickly!" + +While one might have counted ten the enemy hung back as if fearing +that a party of women and children might have planned an ambush, and +then with a yell of triumph, the opening in the palisade was filled +with armed men. + +The defenders in the loft fired at almost the same instant; then, +delaying only sufficiently long to fling back the empty weapons and +take up those that were loaded, three more reports rang out. + +The Frenchmen halted irresolutely for an instant, as four of their +number fell to the ground, and had the children been able to fire +one more volley immediately, it is quite certain the entire party +would have beaten a retreat even at the moment of victory. + +As the men, recovering courage, dashed forward, a heavy peal of +thunder seemed to shake the very earth, and on the moment rain fell +in torrents, coming as suddenly and in such volume as if having been +poured from some immense reservoir. + +The enemy recoiled as if confronted by an overwhelming force, and as +they wavered the children in the loft discharged three muskets, each +bullet seemingly taking effect. + +Then, suddenly, it was as if a black mantel had been dropped over +the terrible scene. A certain portion of the enormous downpour of +water was converted into clouds of steam by the flames, which were +literally beaten down, and those who had struggled so bravely to +defend the island could distinguish nothing. + +[Illustration: Again the crash of thunder drowned all sounds.] + +"What is the matter?" Ellen cried in alarm at thus being suddenly +plunged into profound darkness, and the younger children screamed +with terror. + +A deafening peal of thunder seemingly came in answer to the question +followed a second later by a vivid, blinding flash of lightning +which illumined the interior of the loft through the few crevices +between the logs, until the defenders could see each other's faces +gleaming ghastly pale. + +The water trickling through the roof restored them to their senses +somewhat, and Mark said, speaking as if with an effort: + +"The storm has been gathering since afternoon. Now, while we are +cooped up here in the darkness, the enemy can work his will!" + +Again the crashing of thunder drowned all other sounds; once more +the jagged rifts of unearthly fire, breaking though the clouds, +illumined the scene, and Susan cried, as if unable to believe her +own statement: + +"The men are running away! They are running away!" + +Mark and Luke sprang to her side, waiting for another flash of +lightning, and when it came, preceded by crashing thunder which +caused the house of logs to tremble, the enclosure was deserted. + +"It's true that some of them have gone; perhaps all," Mark +announced; "but the whole crew will come back when the storm is +over, and there will be nothing save our muskets to prevent them +from marching in at their pleasure." + +"Let us give thanks for the mercies which have already been bestowed +upon us," Mistress Pemberton said, devoutly. "The fire is +extinguished, and we need no longer fear being burned to death." + +"That might not be the worst that will befall us," Mark thought, +recalling to mind the fate of those settlers of Maine who had been +put to death by torture. + +Because of the fury of the tempest, it seemed as if its force must +be quickly spent, and the besieged waited in painful suspense, +fearing that the downpour of water would speedily cease; but the +moments went by amid the flashing of lightning and crashing of +thunder, without any abatement of the tempest, save as the wind +lulled for a few seconds to come in yet more spiteful gusts. + +When half an hour had passed, Mistress Pemberton insisted that the +three children should come down from the loft in order that they +might all be together during this respite from the cruel foe, and +when they were in the room below, freed from the fear of immediate +death, thanks were given to Him who "ruleth the tempest" for this +new lease of life, brief though it might prove to be. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +THE WRECK + + +Hope once more sprang up in the hearts of those who had been so +sorely tried, when the storm continued with greal fury. The +electrical portion of the tempest appeared to have passed away, +leaving the raging wind and pelting rain to guard the settlers who +of a verity had descended into the very valley of the shadow of +death. + +When it was understood that that which was at first supposed to be a +summer gale had developed into a furious northeast storm, giving no +token of subsiding, Mark said as he rose to his feet: + +"When the rain first came it seemed as if my throat was parched dry +with thirst, and now that water is to be had in abundance, all hands +of us appear to have forgotten that we wanted a drink." + +"We might catch some of the water that is finding its way through +the roof," Mistress Pemberton said as if such a possibility had +never occurred to her before. + +"We can do better than that, mother dear. I'll go to the spring for +a full bucket, and when it has been strained we shall have what will +be an improvement on rainwater." + +"But possibly some of the enemy may be lurking outside," Mistress +Harding said, becoming timorous once more, now that the imminent +danger had passed. + +"Whoever has been out in the storm all this while will be harmless, +aunt, for his musket would be filled with something other than +powder," Mark replied with a laugh, and then he unbarred the door, +surprised to find that it was only with difficulty he could make +headway against the furious blasts. + +So powerful was the wind that it became necessary for Susan and Luke +to unite their strength in order to close the door while Mark was +absent, and when he returned with a brimming bucket of discolored +water, the three had no little difficulty in putting the bars into +place again. + +"It is the fiercest storm I ever saw!" Mark exclaimed as he dashed +the rain-drops from his face. "We'll pray that the _Future Hopes_ is +in a snug harbor, otherwise she will have to scud, for I don't +believe they could heave her to." + +"Do you think there is any probability your father and uncle may be +out in this tempest?" Mistress Pemberton asked, more anxious now for +the safety of the absent ones then she previously had been +concerning herself. + +"They are too good sailors, mother dear, to take many chances, and +we had fair warning of this storm. If we hadn't been in such sore +straits, there's no question but that we would have been prepared +for it. I noticed the clouds gathering, but at the time thought only +that it would be our misfortune, since we could not keep watch of +the Indians. Close-reefed, and with plenty of sea-room, the _Future +Hopes_ will ride out this gale without doing more harm to herself +than the straining of a seam, perhaps." + +"The Frenchmen could not have had time to get their vessel under +way," Mistress Pemberton said as if thinking aloud, and Mark sprang +to his feet in excitement. + +"Of course they couldn't, and it is well for them if they didn't +succeed in getting on board, for the craft never had been built that +can ride at anchor to the eastward of the brook while the wind is so +heavy. It would have been impossible to get under way, for she'd be +on the rocks before her nose could be brought around into the wind!" + +"Do you suppose they are yet on the island?" + +"I think, unless all hands are good sailors, that they'd try to get +on board, and that could have been done because the sea wouldn't +grow heavy in an instant." + +Further speculation as to the fate of their foes was checked very +suddenly by what sounded like the groaning of a human being in +deepest distress, coming from one corner of the room in which they +were seated. + +Instinctively the inmates of the dwelling clutched each other, for +it was impossible to see anything in that profound darkness, and +during many seconds no one spoke. + +Then the dismal sound could be heard once more, and Mark, forcing +himself to beat down the fear which assailed him, said, with an +effort: + +"Can you find one of the candles, mother? Some one here must be +dying. Where are the children?" + +"Johnny and Jimmie are with me," Ellen said, and Mary added: + +"I'm here with Luke." + +"No one could have got inside without our knowing it," Mistress +Pemberton said, as she groped around for the scanty store of +candles, which were reserved for use on especial occasions. + +Mark did not reply until his mother succeeded, after many fruitless +efforts, in striking a spark from the steel and flint on the tinder, +and as the feeble flame of the candle flickered and flared in the +wind which made its way through the crevices, the lad began to tear +away the barricade of household goods which had been thrown up to +screen the window. + +"It is useless to search there," Mistress Pemberton said, quickly, +as if a sudden thought had come to her. "One of those whom you +wounded is lying outside, and we hear his moans because he is close +beside the building." + +Mark was at the door in an instant, forgetting that he was hastening +to the succor of one who, a short hour previous, was bent on killing +him, and Susan seized the lad by the arm, as she said in a tone of +caution: + +"It may be some trick to get you outside. Be careful what you do; we +have heard that the Indians often make use of such means to get a +victim in their clutches." + +"I'll warrant there is no Indian living who could stay out in this +storm an hour or more, and then be able to do very much mischief," +Mark replied as he unfastened the bar, waiting only long enough for +Luke and Susan to get hold of the door, lest it should be torn from +its hinges by the wind, before he darted out into the blackness. + +A moment later it was possible to hear his voice, as if he spoke to +someone, and then all was still, save for the raging of the tempest, +until he cried from the outside: + +"Open the door, youngsters. I've got a Frenchman here, who must be +very near death!" + +Then, as Luke and Susan gave him admittance, he came staggering into +the room with an apparently lifeless body in his arms, while +Mistress Pemberton shielded the candle as best she might, lest the +wind extinguish the feeble flame. + +Mark laid his burden on the bed, heeding not the fact that the water +was running from every angle of the stranger's garments. + +Like Mark, the two women forgot that a bitter enemy was before them; +but with gentle care set about ministering to his wants, if, indeed +he would have any more in this world. + +Now all the occupants of the dwelling were too much engrossed with +the work of saving the life which had so nearly been taken by one of +their number to be able to tell whether the storm was yet raging, or +if the morning had come. + +In a very short time it was learned that the man lived, although how +he survived after being exposed to the fury of the tempest so long, +could not be understood. He had an ugly-looking wound in the thigh, +and another in the left breast; but Mistress Pemberton gave it as +her opinion that he was not mortally hurt. + +"With good nursing, I doubt not but that he will live," she said, as +she dressed the wounds to the best of her ability. "But if he does, +what shall we do with him?" + +"There is no need to answer that question now, mother dear," Mark +said, gently. "We'll try to pull him through, even if we have +already done our best to kill him, and then he'll know what it is to +have coals of fire heaped on his head; that is," he added, after a +brief pause, "if his comrades allow us to live long enough to do the +job." + +A fire was built, tea of herbs made and administered to the +sufferer, and before morning came it was possible for him to speak. + +He was sufficiently acquainted with the English language to make +them understand him, and his first words were expressive of surprise. + +"Save when you attack us without cause, we have no desire for your +death," Mistress Pemberton replied. "Now you are no longer a +soldier, striving to do us grievous injury, but a suffering fellow +creature, and so long as it is in our power we will do whatsoever we +may toward giving you aid." + +The wounded man turned his face away, as if ashamed to look the good +woman in the face, and after a time Mark questioned him as to how +the chanced to be so near the house. + +From his story, told little by little because of the difficulty +experienced in talking, the facts were soon known. + +He had been among the first to burst through the gate, and was not +wounded until when the last shot was fired. Then instinct prompted +him to gain a shelter under the wall of the building, where it would +not be possible for those on the inside to see him, immediately +after which he lost consciousness. During a long while he remained +as if dead, and it is probable that the deluge of rain served to +revive him after a time; but he was ignorant of having made any +outcry. He remembered of realizing that he was alone, exposed to +the storm, and the next knowledge was that the women were striving +to nurse him back to life. + +[Illustration: The next knowledge was that the women were trying to +nurse him back to life.] + +It was morning before the inmates of the dwelling gave much heed to +anything save the wounded soldier, and then Mark, after cautioning +the remainder of the family to stay inside the dwelling unless they +heard his cry for help, ventured out into the tempest, which +continued with but little decrease of violence. + +The sun had not yet risen, and it the gray light of early dawn it +was not possible to distinguish objects at any great distance. He +had, in the immediate vicinity of the stockade, however, good proof +of the violence with which the storm raged. + +A portion of the palisade itself had been overthrown, leaving an +opening through which the entire force of the enemy might have +marched shoulder to shoulder. Trees were uprooted; the small boat, +which had been drawn beyond reach of the tide, was now within ten +feet of the battered gate, having been carried there by the wind. + +That the buildings within the stockade remained un-injured was due, +doubtless, to the thicket in the rear which served to shield them +from the full fury of the elements. + +Turn where he might, the same scene of devastation met his gaze, and +he understood that if any of the Frenchmen remained on the island +they would be powerless to depart, for their vessel could not have +outlived the night. + +The wind was yet so violent that only with difficulty could he make +his way from one point to another, and the rain beat upon his face +until it became necessary to shield his eyes in order to see +anything twenty paces distant; but he struggled against the +elements, making his way along the shore toward the place where the +Frenchmen's schooner had been moored. + +The vessel no longer remained at her anchorage, nor did he expect to +see her there; but he was not quite prepared for that which met his +gaze when he was where a view of the most northerly point of the +harbor island could be had. + +Between where he stood and the opposite shore was the hull of the +schooner, keel uppermost, tossing on the short waves, now completely +submerged, and again rising high in the air until the greater +portion of the planking could be seen. Clinging to this restless +wreck were six or eight human beings, and on the beach at his feet +lay the bodies of two men who had been beaten down to death during +the conflict of the elements. + +After watching for several moments the plunging, rolling remnant of +what had been a seagoing vessel, fitted to withstand almost any +buffeting of wave or wind, Mark became convinced that the wreck was +moored in some fashion, and then it was possible to guess very +nearly how the disaster had occurred. + +It seemed probable that when the first of the Frenchmen gained the +schooner's deck, after the fury of the tempest had forced them to +retreat from the stockade, the wild tossing of the craft as the +waves were beginning to rise induced them to let go every anchor on +board, under the belief that she could be held at moorings until the +storm had subsided sufficiently to admit of her clawing away from +the shore. + +[Illustration: He gazed at the struggling wretches on the bottom of +the wreck.] + +When the tempest was at its height, and after the attacking party +had succeeded in getting on board, the little craft must have been +literally blown down, until the water, rushing into the open +hatches, had caused her to completely upset. + +The wounded, and all others who were in the cabin, must have been +drowned offhand, and that some of those who tried to save themselves +by clinging to the hulk had suffered a like fate could be told by +the lifeless bodies at Mark's feet. + +Aid had come to the defenders of the island on the wings of the +tempest; and at the very time when it seemed as if all hope of +succor was vain, the enemy had been overcome by "Him who holdeth the +waters in the hollow of His hand." + +As he gazed at the struggling wretches on the bottom of the wreck, +some of whom waved their hands feebly, as if nearly exhausted and +imploring him to help them, Mark forgot that but a few hours +previous these same men had been thirsting for his blood, and +thought only that they were in sore need of his assistance. + +He ran with all speed to the stockade, shouting as he approached, +and when the women and children hastened outside, believing him to +be in distress, he hurriedly told of what he had seen. + +"Of all those who made the attack, I am satisfied that only the men +on the hulk remain alive. It is for us to help them if we can. There +should be enough of us here to drag our boat to the water, and Luke +and I will see what can be done in the way of life-saving." + +Sorely beset though they had been, no one thought at that moment of +the suffering which had been endured because of these men who were +now so near death; but all, even the youngest children, laid hold of +the boat to launch her. + +It was no slight task to drag the craft, small though she was, over +the sand to the water's edge; but the task was finally accomplished, +and then many moments were spent trying to find the oars, which had +been blown out of the boat during such time as the tempest forced +her upon the shore. + +A full half-hour must have elapsed from the moment Mark discovered +the wreck until he and his brother were ready to set off on their +mission of mercy, and then it was an open question as to whether +they would succeed in the battle against the boisterous waves. + +The members of both families stood near the water's edge, regardless +of the furious storm which was raging, as they watched with anxious +eyes the efforts of the lads. They had set out to save lives; but +very many times did it seem as if their own must of a certainty be +sacrificed. + +Fortunately they were partially sheltered from the wind by the +harbor island, otherwise the task could never have been +accomplished, and not until both the lads were well-nigh exhausted +did they arrive at the plunging hulk. + +Now it was that the most dangerous portion of the work must be +performed. Only at imminent risk of swamping the small boat could +she be taken sufficiently near the wreck to permit of a rescue, and +then it was necessary to handle her with the utmost skill, otherwise +she would have been stove to kindling against the side of the hulk. + +When the boat came close at hand, all the Frenchmen gathered at one +point, as if counting on leaping aboard at the same moment, and +Mark shouted, peremptorily: + +"You'll swamp us if more than one comes at a time. Lay back there +you fellows who are the strongest, and help the weakest first!" + +Then they quarreled among themselves, each insisting that he was in +the greatest need of help, and Mark, finally becoming impatient, +cried, sternly: + +"If you can't come aboard like decent people, we'll leave the whole +boiling of you to get along as may be possible." + +"There is not one of us who can cling to this wreck half an hour +longer," a man cried, piteously. "Already five have been washed away +and drowned." + +"Two of you take hold and send aboard that fellow who is lying +across the keel. He seems to be in the worst shape. Stand back!" +the lad added, as four men made ready to seize the small boat at +the first opportunity. "If you come in other order than I give the +word, I'll leave all hands." + +By dint of scolding, pulling the boat forward or back as the waves +threatened, and otherwise handling his small craft in a sailorly +fashion, Mark succeeded in getting four of the men aboard, leaving +three to be rescued later. + +The boat would carry no more of a load than she then had, while the +storm was so furious, and the lads pulled shoreward, aided greatly, +when going in this direction, by the wind. + +The members of both families gathered on the beach near about where +a landing would be made, and when the shipwrecked men had been set +ashore they were helped toward the stockade by the women and +children, for the Frenchmen were so nearly exhausted that it was +impossible to walk unaided. + +Then Mark and Luke started on the second journey, battling quite as +desperately as before, and the day was fully half-spent when they +brought the last of the survivors ashore. + +It was not until the seven Frenchmen were being cared for in the +apartment of the Pemberton house where the wounded soldier lay, that +the lad began to realize the possible danger. These eight men, after +having recovered, might easily take possession of the stockade, and +Mark was inclined to believe that people who were willing to make +war on women and children, could not be trusted to play a manly part +even toward those who had saved them from death. + +"What shall we do with them all?" Susan asked, as she came out of +the house, which had much the appearance of a hospital, to where +Mark stood studying the matter seriously. + +"It has just come into my mind that we might herd them in your +father's house. The greater portion of the things have been taken +from there, and we can arrange it to bar the doors and shutters on +the outside." + +"Are you counting on holding them as prisoners?" Susan asked, in +surprise. + +"That is the only way we may be certain of a crew like that. After +all that has happened, I wouldn't believe in any promises that might +be made, and they shall be guarded like so many wildcats." + +"Every one of whom appears to be grateful." + +"Ay, I suppose they are now, before having recovered; but it may be +a different matter, once they're in good shape." + +"Do you believe there can be any on the harbor island?" + +"I'm satisfied there are no others alive out of all the crew of +French and Indians. Luke and I counted on burying the bodies which +have been washed ashore, and while we are at that work you had +better gather up all the muskets and ammunition, hiding the lot in +the stable until we have the men secured." + +Then, calling his brother, Mark set off toward the beach to perform +the last rites over those who had lost their lives while trying to +commit murder most foul, and, that having been done, the two lads +began transforming the Harding house into a prison, which last was +done by fastening all the shutters and one of the doors on the +outside. The other door was to be barred in such a manner that it +could be readily opened by those who were charged with the care of +the Frenchmen. + +These tasks were not completed until nightfall, and then Mark told +the rescued party exactly what it was his purpose to do, explaining +that he was not ready to believe in any protestations they might +make. + +"You must be held prisoners until our fathers return, and it is to +be remembered that if we find one of you attempting to leave the +building, which will be given over to your use, we shall shoot him +down without the slightest feeling of pity or remorse." + +The men swore most solemnly that they would obey every command which +might be given by those who had saved them from death, and Mark, +armed with a loaded musket, lost no time in escorting them to the +Harding house. + +It was his intention to have them closely guarded during every hour +of the day and night, and to such end Luke was stationed at the +front of the building, where, through a crevice which had been made +between the logs by Mark, he could keep his charges in view. + +Mistress Pemberton would not consent to having the wounded man +removed with the others. He was given a bed in one corner of the +room, after the furniture piled up as a barricade had been put in +place, and Mary and Ellen were instructed to watch him, not with the +idea that he might try to escape, but because his condition was +such, owing to the wounds and subsequent exposure, that the most +careful nursing and attention was needed. + +The storm subsided at sunset; the clouds disappeared, and the first +night after the besieged were turned jailers was as calm and +peaceful as if the harmony of nature had never been disturbed by the +clash of arms. + +Luke remained on duty until about ten o'clock in the evening, when +Susan took his place, and shortly after midnight Mark took his turn +at guarding the prisoners. + +The Frenchmen had shown no signs of a disposition to do other than +as they were commanded; but Mark would not put faith in them, and +kept his watch as if knowing they had already formed a plan for +capturing those who succored them. + +The lad paced to and fro in front of the dwelling, looking in upon +the men every five minutes, until a new day had come, and then as he +gazed across the waters watching for the sun to rise, he saw the +dingy canvas of the _Future Hopes_, glistening like silver in the +early light. + +The fresh breeze was bearing the little vessel swiftly on, and +before any inmate of the Pemberton house was astir, she swung to her +anchor close inside the harbor, while the two men listened to the +story which Mark had to tell. + +The fishermen had not been able to gain a shelter when the storm +burst upon them, therefore the _Future Hopes_ scudded before the +wind during the four and twenty hours, which explained why she had +arrived so much sooner than had been expected. + +It would be a labor of love to follow the fortunes of these two +families who, in 1758, defended the Island of Mount Desert so +bravely against the combined attacks of French and Indians; but +historians make no further mention of them, after setting forth in +the fewest possible words their deeds, therefore this tale must +perforce come to an end. + +We do know, however, from the records of Pemaquid, that Masters +Pemberton and Harding carried to the fort eight Frenchmen as +prisoners, and that the authorities of Massachusetts took them in +charge several weeks later. + +It is also known that in 1769 one Mark Pemberton, with his wife +Susan, settled on Penobscot Bay near where the town of Camden now +stands, and it is reasonable to infer that this man was the same +who, aided by Susan Harding, so bravely defended the island. + + + + +THE END. + + +[Transcriber's Notes:] + +Here are all the misspelled words, odd usages and other things of +note that I have found. + +The word "defence", as it is spelled throughout, is time period +spelling. + +1. This paragraph is accurate to the book. It could read like this: +"...otherwise the defences would not be being strengthened when the +boys should have been making ready...". + +2. The words "any one" appear to be time period usage. It is used +twice. + +3. The original does use the word "then" though it should probably +be "when": "...relieved from guard duty, and when the gate had been +closed..." + +4. The original does use the word "and": "...the gate was barred on +the inside, and Mary Pemberton standing close beside it..." + +5. The original does use the word "prosecute". I +suspect it is just time period usage. "...in position to prosecute +their murderous work." + +6. This paragraph is accurate to the book: "...there's no show of +our being able to do anything here..." + +7. The second "e" in the word "reëchoed" is a small letter "e" with +diaeresis. + +8. The word "of" appears to be time period usage: "...uncle heard +from those aboard of the last vessel...". + +9. The word "resentiments" appears to be a misprint of +"resentments". "...gave vent to their resentiments and rage..." + +10. The words "some one" appear to be time period usage. + +11. The second "e" in the word "reëntered" is a small letter "e" +with diaeresis. It is also used in the title of the 13th +illustration. + +12. This paragraph is accurate to the book: "...shake the very +earth, and on the moment rain fell in torrents..." + +13. The word "greal" appears to be a misprint for "great": "...the +storm continued with greal fury." + +14. The words "some one" appear to be time period usage. + +15. The word "of" appears to be time period usage: "...to permit of +a rescue..." + +[End of Transcriber's Notes.] + + + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Defending the Island, by James Otis + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DEFENDING THE ISLAND *** + +***** This file should be named 34558-8.txt or 34558-8.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/4/5/5/34558/ + +Produced by Zechariah Stover (ZechariahStover.com) + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/34558-8.zip b/34558-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..44d7793 --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-8.zip diff --git a/34558-h.zip b/34558-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9150998 --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h.zip diff --git a/34558-h/34558-h.htm b/34558-h/34558-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f18ddb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/34558-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,2959 @@ +<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN"> +<html> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of Defending the Island, by James Otis + </title> + <style type="text/css"> + body{ + text-align: center; + } + #container{ + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + width: 80%; + text-align: left; + } + .center{ + text-align: center; + } + a:hover { + color: #36f; + } + h1 { + font-family: Helvetica, Geneva, Arial, + SunSans-Regular, sans-serif; + text-align: center; + } + h2 { + font-family: Helvetica, Geneva, Arial, + SunSans-Regular, sans-serif; + text-align: center; + } + h3 { + font-family: Helvetica, Geneva, Arial, + SunSans-Regular, sans-serif; + text-align: center; + line-height: 2em; + } + </style> + + </head> + <body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Defending the Island, by James Otis + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Defending the Island + A story of Bar Harbor in 1758 + +Author: James Otis + +Release Date: December 4, 2010 [EBook #34558] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DEFENDING THE ISLAND *** + + + + +Produced by Zechariah Stover (ZechariahStover.com) + + + + + +</pre> + + <div id="container"> + + <div class=center> + <img src="images/dti-cover.jpg" alt="[Illustration: Cover]"> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <h1>Defending the Island.</h1> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <a id="pic_1"></a><img src="images/dti-1.jpg" alt="[Illustration: Friend or enemy? (See chaper III.)]"> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <h1>DEFENDING THE ISLAND</h1> + <h2>A STORY OF BAR HARBOR IN 1758</h2> + <h3>BY</h3> + <h2>JAMES OTIS</h2> + <br> + <img id="pic_2" src="images/dti-2.jpg" alt="[Illustration: Illustrated]"> + <br> + <br> + <h3>Boston<br>DANA ESTES & COMPANY<br>PUBLISHERS</h3> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <p> <i>Copyright, 1904</i></p> + <p> BY DANA ESTES & COMPANY</p> + <p> <i>All rights reserved</i></p> + </div> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <p><span class=center id="toc"><b>CONTENTS</b></span> + <br> <a href="#I">I. THE ISLAND</a> + <br> <a href="#II">II. THE FIRST ASSAULT</a> + <br> <a href="#III">III. A DAY OF SUSPENSE</a> + <br> <a href="#IV">IV. AN ATTACK</a> + <br> <a href="#V">V. FIRE</a> + <br> <a href="#VI">VI. THE WRECK</a> + </p> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <p><span class=center><b>LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</b></span> + <br> <a href="#pic_1">Friend or enemy? (See Chapter III.) <i>Frontispiece</i></a> + <br> <a href="#pic_3">"'Indians skulking on the harbor island!'"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_4">"The stout-hearted girl set about the task"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_5">"Susan stood guard at the gateway"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_6">"The children had improvised platforms"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_7">"Mark saw a canoe put off from the Harbor Island"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_8">"'You shall not have the smallest chicken inside this stockade!'"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_9">"'Look! Look! A vessel!'"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_10">"He returned with a heavy log"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_11">"'Do you refuse to surrender?'"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_12">"An instant later the entire party was in retreat"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_13">"Susan's arm was being rebandaged"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_14">"He reëntered the house with a bucket two-thirds full of muddy water"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_15">"Again the crash of thunder drowned all sounds"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_16">"The next knowledge was that the women were trying to nurse him back to life"</a> + <br> <a href="#pic_17">"He gazed at the struggling wretches on the bottom of the wreck"</a> + </p> + <br><br> + <div class=center><h1>Defending the island.</h1></div> + <br><br> + <div class=center id=I><h3>CHAPTER I<br>THE ISLAND</h3></div> + <br> + <p>In the year of grace 1758 there were two families living on that + island which we of to-day call Mount Desert; but Champlain named + Mons Deserts, because its thirteen high, rugged mountains could be + seen from the seaward a distance of twenty leagues, making it the + first landmark of the coast for seamen.</p> + <p>It is said, by those gentlemen who write down historical facts for + us young people to study, that the "savages were much attached to + the island; for in the mountains they hunted bears, wildcats, + raccoons, foxes, and fowls; in the marshes and natural meadows, + beaver, otter and musquash; and in the waters they took fin and + shellfish."</p> + <p>Now in the proper kind of a story there should be nothing which + savors of school-book study, and yet, before telling how the + children of these two families defended the island in 1758, it seems + much as if the reader would have a better idea of all that was done, + if he or she knew just a few facts concerning those who lived on + Mount Desert before Stephen Pemberton and Silas Harding took there + their wives and children to build for themselves homes.</p> + <p>It is said, by those who busy themselves with finding out about such + things, that in the year 1605 Champlain stopped at the island and + named it; but not until four years later did any white people visit + the place. Then two Jesuit missionaries, who had been living at Port + Royal, under the protection of Monsieur Biencourt, went to Mount + Desert with the hope of converting the Indians to Christianity.</p> + <p>How long these good men lived there, no one seems to know; but it is + certain that they went back to Port Royal quite soon, because, in + the year 1613, a Frenchman, by the name of La Suassaye, the agent of + Madame de Guercheville, a very rich and religious lady, visited Port + Royal, and persuaded the missionaries to return to Mount Desert, in + company with several French colonists.</p> + <p>An Englishman by the name of Argall, who had come across the ocean + to drive away the French people from North America, in order to take + possession of the country in the name of his king, found the + settlers while they were yet living in tents, not having had time to + build houses. He robbed them of all their goods, afterward sending + them adrift in an open boat, to make certain they wouldn't encroach + on the land to which he believed they had no claim.</p> + <p>The French people, after suffering severely, contrived to gain the + mainland, however, and before many months had passed returned to + Mount Desert, where they formed a settlement, which did not survive + the encroachments of the Indians, as is known from the fact that + when, in 1704, the great Indian fighter from Massachusetts, Major + Benjamin Church, rendezvoused at Mount Desert, before attacking the + Baron de Castine on Penobscot Bay, he found no person living there.</p> + <p>In 1746 Stephen Pemberton and Silas Harding, with their wives, who + were sisters, and their children, emigrated from England to Acadia, + in Nova Scotia, hoping there to make better homes for themselves and + their little ones than could be had in their native land. Then came + the quarrels between the French and English, until Acadia was not a + very pleasant land in which to live, and these two settlers + determined to find an abiding-place where they might not be + literally overrun by the soldiers of two armies.</p> + <p>Therefore it was that they built a small vessel, in which they could + carry all their household belongings, including two cows, three or + four pigs, and a flock of chickens, and started on a voyage that did + not come to an end until they were arrived at the island of Mount + Desert, near the mouth of what is now known as Duck Brook, within a + short distance of the present town of Bar Harbor.</p> + <p>There the men built two small houses of logs, enclosed by a + palisade, which is a high fence formed by driving stakes into the + ground, for protection against the Indians, whom they had every + reason to fear.</p> + <p>Here the two families lived in peace and comparative comfort until + the year 1758, and then there were children in plenty.</p> + <p>Stephen Pemberton had in his family Mark, who was fifteen years old; + Luke, two years younger; Mary, aged eleven and John, a stout lad of + eight years.</p> + <p>Silas Harding's children were Susan, who was fourteen years old; + Mary, four years younger, and James, who had lived seven years on + Mount Desert without having seen ten white people, save those + belonging to his own and Uncle Stephen Pemberton's family.</p> + <p>Now after so many words which have not been strung together in a + very entertaining fashion, it is time to begin the story of what was + done by these children, with, as a matter of course, some assistance + from their mothers.</p> + <p>Each summer, just before the work of harvesting should be begun, the + two men went out in the boat which had brought them from Acadia, to + catch fish enough for the winter's supply, and on this year they set + off early in September, with never a thought that any danger might + menace their dear ones after so many years of peace and comparative + prosperity.</p> + <p>The children had work in plenty to keep them from idleness during + the week of ten days their fathers might be absent, and no sooner + had the little vessel sailed out of the harbor than they set about + their several tasks in order that all the labor might be performed + by the time the fishermen returned.</p> + <p>Mark and Luke were engaged in setting up the flakes, or framework, + on which the fish were to be dried, and this labor was performed + near the shore of the harbor quite beyond sight of the homesteads + with the high palisade, which last hid from view all save the roofs + of the buildings.</p> + <p>The <i>Future Hopes</i>, which was the name of the small vessel belonging + to the settlers, had left her moorings when the first gray light of + the coming day could be seen stealing over the waters, and while she + was yet close in-shore the two lads set about building the flakes, + counting on completing the task within three days, and to that end + working so industriously as to give little or no heed to what might + be passing around them.</p> + <p>Therefore it was that they failed to see a canoe, in which were five + Indians, come swiftly up from the southward, past what is now known + as Pulpit Rock, and sail straight for the island at the mouth of the + harbor, which the people of to-day call Bar Island.</p> + <p>Here the frail craft was hidden from view of the boys, and when half + an hour or more had gone by, another canoe, this one carrying six + men, executed the same maneuver.</p> + <p>Five minutes later a third craft appeared, but just as she came in + view past the rock, Luke stood erect to drive in one of the stakes, + and, therefore, saw the strangers as they were evidently trying to + steal by without being seen.</p> + <p>More than once since Luke could remember had Mount Desert been + visited by red men of the Abenakis tribe; but the visitors had + always approached boldly, like friends, and this skulking from rock + to island seemed much like a show of enmity.</p> + <p>Certain it is that the lad was alarmed, but he understood, from what + his father had said many times, that it was not wise to let the + Indians know of his fear, and, continuing at the labor, he said, in + a low tone, to Mark:</p> + <p>"Don't raise your head, nor look around. A canoe filled with + Abenakis has sneaked in behind the harbor island; can it be mischief + is intended?"</p> + <p>"They may be after rock-cod, and count on coming ashore later," Mark + replied, continuing his work in such a fashion that he could look + seaward without seeming to do so.</p> + <p>At this moment the occupants of the last canoe were moving around + the point of the island, as if to gain a position where a full view + of the buildings might be had, for there could be no possibility the + visitors were engaged in fishing, of any other such peaceful pursuit.</p> + <p>"There's trouble of some kind, and it's for us to find out what," + Mark said, in a whisper. "There must have been other canoes than the + one you saw, for I have already counted eleven men on the island, + and they could not all have come in a single boat."</p> + <p>The boys had had no experience, fortunately for them, in Indian + warfare, but they had heard enough from their parents to be fully + alive to the possibilities, and after a few moments, during which + time fear had held them speechless, Mark said, in a low tone, + although there was no chance the enemy could have heard him:</p> + <p>"We must get over to the house without seeming to be running away. + You start first, and when you go through the gate, call out that + mother wants to see me."</p> + <p>Luke obeyed leisurely, although his heart was beating so loudly and + heavily that it seemed as if it could be heard a long distance away, + and, arriving at the palisade, he summoned his brother, as had been + proposed.</p> + <p>Then it was that Mark was at liberty to leave his work, and he + answered the summons more quickly, perhaps, than ever before in his + life.</p> + <p>Mistress Pemberton was busily engaged inside the house, and the + other two children were in a small garden directly in the rear of + the building, therefore the boys were able to impart the + disagreeable tidings without alarming those who could be of little + or no assistance.</p> + <p>"Indians skulking on the harbor island!" the good woman exclaimed, + when Mark had hurriedly told his story and her face paled as the + lads had never seen it before.</p> + <p>"And they have chanced to come on the very day our father went + fishing!" Luke cried.</p> + <p>"It wasn't chance that brought them, my son. Unless coming for some + evil purpose, they would have landed boldly, as they have done so + many times. It must be that the painted wretches have been watching + to learn when your father and uncle left the island! Ask your aunt + and Susan to come over her; the other children need not be told + until it is no longer possible to hold them in ignorance of what may + be done."</p> + <p>Luke ran swiftly to the house, which stood hardly more than fifty + feet away, and in a twinkling Mistress Harding and her daughter + Susan were where they could hear what, to settlers in their + situation, was the worst possible news.</p> + <a id="pic_3"></a><img src="images/dti-3.jpg" alt="[Illustration: Indians skulking on the harbor island!]"> + <br> + <p>Women who did their share in conquering the wilderness were not + cowardly, even though they might turn pale with apprehension when + the first note of danger was sounded, and there two, knowing it was + useless to expect aid from the outside, lost no time in planning a + defence.</p> + <p>The palisade was weak in many places; more than one of the timbers + had decayed and fallen, for while the Indians from the near-by + mainland were friendly disposed, there seemed to be no good reason + why time and labor should be expended upon a means of defence which + might never be needed, and at this moment both the women bethought + themselves of such fact.</p> + <p>"There may be time in which to strengthen the fence," Mistress + Harding suggested, and Mark, who considered himself as well-nigh + being a man grown, took the part of leader by saying, stoutly:</p> + <p>"In can be done, aunt. Luke and I will get the timbers, and the + other children shall drag them out of the woods, coming into the + enclosure near the spring where the Indians cannot see them."</p> + <p>"But surely we can do something to help the work along," his mother + said, quickly.</p> + <p>"So you shall. We must know what the Indians are about, and you two + can take one of the small boys down near the shore. Stay there as if + bent on pleasuring, and, without seeming to do so, keep a sharp + watch on the harbor island. I will look after the rest."</p> + <p>Boys who lived on the frontier in 1758 were accustomed to doing the + work of men, and very seldom was one found to be a coward.</p> + <p>Now that danger in its most frightful form menaced, Mark Pemberton + understood that he must stand in the place of his father and uncle. + And there was no disposition on his part to shirk the + responsibility. He knew full well that there was no hope the + fishermen would return for at least a full week, therefore he must + work unaided, save as the women and other children might be able to + help him.</p> + <p>The axes were near at hand; Mary Pemberton and Ellen Harding were + summoned from the garden, and the two younger boys sent with their + mothers to the shore.</p> + <p>As the five young people went into the thicket, which had been left + standing in the rear of the dwellings that it might serve to break + the force of the north winds in the winter, the younger girls + learned of the painted peril on the harbor island, and Mark + explained his plan of defence, so far as he had formed one.</p> + <p>The two boys set about their task feverishly, knowing that every + moment was precious, for no one could say when the attack might be + made; the only matter certain in the minds of all was that the + Indians had come bent on mischief, otherwise there would have been + no skulking on the island.</p> + <p>The palisade, as originally built, stood six feet above the surface + of the land, and the posts were driven a good four feet into the + ground, therefore large timbers were necessary, and perhaps Mark was + the only member of the party who realized that when the work of + driving the logs in place was begun, the enemy would have a very + good idea of what was being done.</p> + <p id=tn1>The skulkers on the island must, as a matter of course, know that + they were discovered, and their purpose suspected, otherwise the + defences would not be in process of strengthening when the boys + should have been making ready for the curing of such fish as the + fishermen might bring in. <a href="#t1">1</a></p> + <p>Then was the moment when, possibly, the attack would be made, and + all preparations for resistance concluded before the first blow was + struck on the palisade.</p> + <p>"There will be a moon to-night," Susan Harding said, quietly, and + Mark knew she was thinking of what might be expected after the sun + had set, therefore he replied, to encourage her:</p> + <p>"Ay, Sue, the painted villains can't come across without showing + themselves for some time before gaining the beach, and Luke and I + should be able to warm their hides a bit."</p> + <p>"I can shoot as well as you."</p> + <p>"So you can, Sue and the worst part of it is that you must do your + share of the work."</p> + <p>"Will you watch on the shore for them to-night?"</p> + <p>"I think so. Luke and I can be there, while the rest of you are + inside."</p> + <p>"I shall go with you," and the girl spoke as if demanding a part in + some scheme of pleasure.</p> + <p>"Perhaps you can; we'll see what the plan shall be when night comes. + The fence may not be in shape then, and I'm hoping the Indians will + hold off for a darker night. That's about the only chance we've got + to save ourselves from being killed, or carried prisoners to Canada."</p> + <p>"If they had landed on this island, they might have crept up without + our suspecting anything," Susan suggested, and Mark literally + trembled with fear, for thought came to his mind that possibly + another body of savages was on Mount Desert, counting on coming up + through the thicket when the attack was begun.</p> + <p>However, as he said to himself a moment later, after struggling + manfully against this new fear which assailed him, that was a matter + which could not be guarded against, other than as the general + defences were strengthened, and it stood him in hand to think of + work rather than all which might happen.</p> + <p>"Remember, I'm to take my place with you and Luke," Susan insisted, + and the lad, knowing she could be depended upon to use a musket + nearly as well as himself, replied:</p> + <p id=tn2>"So you shall, Sue; I promise to call on you as I would on Luke. + Here is the first timber," he added, as he struck the finishing + blows to the sharpened end of the log. "Drag it inside to the + weakest place in the fence, and take good care that you don't go + where any one on the harbor island can see you." <a href="#t2">2</a></p> + <p>Aided by Mary and Ellen, the stout-hearted girl set about the task + of carrying the heavy log, since that would be the quickest method + of getting it into place, and the boys plied their axes yet more + vigorously in order to have another timber in readiness when the + carriers returned.</p> + <a id="pic_4"></a><img src="images/dti-4.jpg" alt="[Illustration: The stout-hearted girl set about the task.]"> + <br> + <p>"Take nothing smaller than six inches through the butt, and we'll + drive the tapering end into the ground," Mark cried, cheerily, as he + selected a second tree, and Luke had but just finished hewing his + log when the girls came for another load.</p> + <p>"I ran down to talk with mother and aunt," Susan said, speaking with + difficulty because of her heavy breathing. "They have seen only one + Indian, who lies behind the big rock keeping watch, and he is + Sewattis, who came here for potatoes last winter."</p> + <p>"And we gave him all he could carry away!" Mark exclaimed bitterly. + "Now he has come to try and murder us because we have ever been his + good friends."</p> + <p>"Is there any war on the mainland?" Susan asked.</p> + <p>"The captain of the last fishing-vessel father boarded told him that + an attack had been made by the French and Indians on the fort at St. + George last month, so I suppose England and France are still + fighting. If the two kings could be in our places just now, I reckon + there'd be an end of the war before nightfall."</p> + <p>"It isn't three months since Master Peabody and his wife were killed + on Arrowsick Island, and the six children carried into Canada," + Luke suggested, grimly, and Mark cried, peremptorily:</p> + <p>"Don't be digging up every horrible thing you can remember, for it + won't improve our courage, and we're like to need all we've got + between now and sunset. Here's another timber, Sue. Before you come + back again, get some idea of how many we're needing to put the fence + in shape."</p> + <p>Luke would have talked of the murders which had been reported to the + settlers of the island by the fishermen, who were spoken from time + to time; but Mark bade him keep at his chopping, and in silence the + two worked until Susan, after an unusually long absence, returned.</p> + <p>"There are seventeen logs missing," she reported, "and two more + which are decayed so badly that they should be replaced. I walked + slowly around the fence, and tried every one, to make certain it + stood firm."</p> + <p>"We should be able to cut that number and get them in place before + the afternoon is very old," Mark replied, as he swung his axe yet + more vigorously. "Did you go down to the shore?"</p> + <p>"Yes, and everything there is as it was before. Your mother thinks + it is a wicked waste of time for both to stay on guard, when it + would be possible for them to do so much toward helping in getting + out the timbers."</p> + <p>"The moment will soon come when she can lend a hand, but just now + she is doing more good by staying where she is, for while those two + are idle the Indians will not suspect that we are strengthening our + defences. The other boys might help in dragging the logs down, Sue, + for we've got five or six ready."</p> + <p>"Mary and I, with Ellen to steady them through the bushes, can soon + catch up with you, and the boys would be more bother than good," + Susan replied, as she raised one end of a heavy timber.</p> + <p>During the next hour the five young people worked as industriously + as their elders could have done, and then Susan announced that her + mother was intending to make ready the noonday meal, for it was in + the highest degree necessary that those who were laboring so + energetically, and who would be called upon, perhaps, to spend the + night in watching, should have an ample supply of food.</p> + <p>The boys ate dinner as they worked, Ellen bringing it out to them, + and, while Mistress Harding cooked for both families, Mistress + Pemberton remained on guard.</p> + <p>During all that time very little had been learned regarding the + savages. Now and then a painted face had been seen momentarily from + behind one of the rocks on the harbor island; but nothing more, and + the defenders of the stockade had no means of knowing when the + attack might be expected.</p> + <p>It was about two hours past noon when the boys had cut the necessary + number of timbers, and now was come the time when the enemy would + get an inkling that the settlers were making ready to defend + themselves.</p> + <p>"You can't help us very much, Sue, when we are driving the posts + into place," Mark said. "Leave Ellen here, while you overhaul our + muskets. See to it that each one is loaded, and where we can get at + it readily. After that has been done, you had best stand by the + gateway to give the work if any move is made by the villains."</p> + <p>Then the boys began the task of setting the timbers in place, + fearing each instant to hear the word that the savages were crossing + over from the small island.</p> + <p>When the third timber had been driven in place, Mark said, grimly, + as he raised another stick to fit it into the palisade:</p> + <p>"If they come now, we shall be in a bad scrape; but in case they are + foolish enough to wait until after dark, I reckon we can give a good + account of ourselves."</p> + <p>In order to drive the logs sufficiently deep into the earth, to + prevent the possibility of their being pulled out by the foe, it was + necessary for one of the boys to stand on an up-ended cask, and + while in suck position a view of the tiny island at the mouth of the + harbor could readily be had.</p> + <p>It was Mark who swung the heavy wooden maul, or mallet, and he + strove to keep his eyes fixed upon that point of land behind which + he knew the Indians lurked.</p> + <p>To his great relief, no change was apparent in the position of the + enemy, although those in hiding must have known what was being done, + and the boys worked unmolested.</p> + <p>After she had make ready the muskets for immediate use, Susan + stationed herself at the gateway of the palisade, with a weapon + leaning against the logs on the inside, watching intently, and after + half an hour had passed Mark called to her:</p> + <p>"There's little chance now that they'll begin the mischief before + dark, if the noise of our pounding hasn't started them. Mother and + aunt may come back here and do some more cooking, for once the + Abenakis begin work we shall need to have all hands on duty. You can + keep an eye on the island from where you are."</p> + <a id="pic_5"></a><img src="images/dti-5.jpg" alt="[Illustration: Susan stood guard at the gateway.]"> + <br> + <p>This change was welcomed by the women, who came up from the shore + quickly, stopping at the palisade to see how the lads were getting + along, when Mistress Pemberton said to Mark:</p> + <p>"I have been thinking that we had better gather in one of the + buildings which can be barricaded on the inside, instead of trying + to occupy both."</p> + <p>"It's a good idea, mother dear, and while you're making the changes, + see to it that we have plenty of water in the house."</p> + <p>"What about the cows?"</p> + <p>"We can't take the chances of going after them, for no one can say + that there are not more Indians hidden in the woods. If the beasts + come home, we'll have a mess of milk to help out on the supplies."</p> + <p>Now it was that every member of the two families was actively + engaged, while Susan stood guard at the gateway.</p> + <p>The Harding house was stripped of everything which could be readily + moved, and the rude furniture served admirably as a barricade for + the windows and one door of the Pemberton dwelling.</p> + <p>The sun had not set when Mark had put the palisade into the best + condition possible with the materials at his command, and then, + after cautioning Susan to keep her eyes open very wide, the two boys + began making loopholes in the house which was to shelter both + families. This last was being done, as Mark explained to his mother, + that they might have a final place of refuge in case the Indians + succeeded in scaling the palisade.</p> + <a href="#toc">Return to Contents</a> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <div class=center id=II><h3>CHAPTER II<br>THE FIRST ASSAULT</h3></div> + <br> + <p id=tn3>Not until the shadows of night were beginning to lengthen was Susan + relieved from guard duty, and then the gate had been closed and + barred by Mark, who said to his cousin: <a href="#t3">3</a></p> + <p>"There is little chance an attack will be made until after night has + come, when they count on finding us asleep, mayhap, although it + would be queer people who could close their eyes in rest while a + crowd of men was waiting for a good opportunity to kill them."</p> + <p>"Why am I to go off duty?" Susan asked. "Surely it can do us no harm + to stand guard, and even though the savages do not make any move, we + should act as if believing they might do so at any moment."</p> + <p>"You are right, Sue, and I warrant you won't have many idle minutes. + Your mother and mine want all the children together while they pray + for the good God to help us, and surely He is the only one to whom + we can appeal now."</p> + <p>The girl made no further parley, but marched directly toward the + Pemberton house, stopping very suddenly, however, as a low sound, + not unlike the call of a human being, was heard from the woods in + the rear of the dwellings.</p> + <p>"There are the cows, Mark, and surely they must be brought inside + the enclosure if for no other reason than that we may need the milk + before those murderers—"</p> + <p>Susan did not finish the sentence, for the thought had come that it + was not unlikely those who were skulking on the harbor island might + succeed in their purpose, as they had done so many times before when + setting forth to capture and to murder.</p> + <p>"I'll go after the beasts, and you shall stand here to keep watch + over the harbor, for I am not minded to take the chances of being + surprised, ever though we have good reason to believe no mischief + will be attempted until late in the night."</p> + <p>To this Susan would not agree. She insisted that, having been + charged with the care of the cows during so many years, they would + follow her more readily than any other, and it might be possible + something would happen to frighten them.</p> + <p>Mark, who feared there were Indians hidden in the thicket, would + have prevented her from venturing out of the stockade; but she put + an end to the controversy by slipping through the gate immediately + he had opened it, and the lad could do no less than remain on guard + while she was absent.</p> + <p>The animals followed the girl contentedly when she appeared before + them, even though they were not accustomed to being brought within + the enclosure during the warm season, and as they filed through the + gate Mark felt decidedly more comfortable in mind, for now, in case + they were able to hold the Indians in check, there was no + possibility of a lack of food if the siege should be prolonged.</p> + <p>With the cows in the shed that served as stable during the winter + months, where was a plentiful supply of hay which had been made + during the summer, the children went into the house, which seemed + strangely changed by the addition of Mistress Harding's belongings + and preparations already made for defence.</p> + <p>Nearly all the rude furniture was piled against the two windows and + one of the doors, and the beds had been spread on the floor where + they would best be screened from any stray bullets. A supply of fuel + was stacked up near the fireplace, to the end that it might be + possible to prepare food without necessity of going out of doors, + and, as Mark had suggested, every available vessel was filled with + water.</p> + <p>When the three children, who had been doing such valiant work in + strengthening the defences, entered the building, they found the + women and smaller children gathered close beside each other as if + such near companionship lessened the danger, and Mark said, gently:</p> + <p>"It is not well that we stay indoors many minutes, mother dear, for + much remains to be done before night has fully come."</p> + <p>Then it was, and without delay, that Mistress Pemberton knelt amid + the frightened brood, pouring forth her supplications for strength + and guidance in this their time of peril, and the children listened + to the petition as they had never done before. It was as if the + prayer had a different meaning than ever before, for unless it + should be answered then was the time of suffering or of death come + very near.</p> + <p>Even the youngest children understood that this was the only appeal + for help which could be made, and never a question was asked or a + word spoken when Mark, Luke, and Susan, rising to their feet + immediately the petition had been brought to a close went + out-of-doors muskets in hand.</p> + <p>When they were in the open air once more Mark proposed that they + make such platforms behind the palisade as was practical with the + limited amount of material at hand, in order that, in event of an + attack, it would be possible to use their weapons with good effect + to prevent the enemy from scaling the barricade.</p> + <p>Two up-ended casks formed as many stations, while at other points + the wash-benches, tubs, horses for wood-sawing, and household + utensils were piled up or pushed unto position at such height as + would afford a view of the harbor island and the intervening space.</p> + <p>When this work had been completed the children had eight improvised + platforms whereon they could stand while defending the stockade, and + the night was fully come.</p> + <a id="pic_6"></a><img src="images/dti-6.jpg" alt="[Illustration: The children had improvised platforms.]"> + <br> + <p>As Susan had said, the moon was in the third quarter, therefore it + would be impossible for the Indians to paddle across the waters of + the harbor without exposing themselves to the view of the island + defenders.</p> + <p>It was a portion of Mark's plan that a guard should be stationed on + the shore, in full sight of those who might approach, and, in event + of an advance, the battle would be begun while the enemy was in the + canoes.</p> + <p>This much he explained to his companions, as they stood by the gate + ready to face the more immediate danger to the end that their loved + ones might the better be protected, and he added, in conclusion:</p> + <p>"After all we've seen it would be foolish to pretend we do not know + why the Abenakis have come, therefore when they put out from the + island, I shall hail them once, warning all hands to stay where they + are until the sun has risen, after which we will open fire, trying + to do the greatest possible amount of execution in order to show + what may be expected. I've got four of five charges of ammunition, + and if the rest of you have as much we shall be able to make quite a + showing."</p> + <p>At that moment the noise of someone moving across the enclosure + startled the children; but an instant later they saw that Mistress + Harding was going toward the shed to milk the cows.</p> + <p>"Now come on," Mark said, opening the gate after learning the cause + of his momentary alarm, and the children went boldly forth to do + battle—two boys and a girl who counted on defending the island + against fifteen or twenty savages.</p> + <p>It was not to e supposed that the Indians, seeing the sentinels, + would come directly across from the island; but might be expected to + dart swiftly toward one or the other headlands, and therefore it was + that Mark divided his small force, sending Luke to patrol the + northern point, while he paced to and fro on the southern side of + the harbor where it was more reasonable to suppose a landing would + be attempted. Susan was to walk back and forth on the shore between + the two lads.</p> + <p>Once this division of forces had been made, the children began their + vigil, on the alert for any suspicious noises either behind or in + front of them, for there was yet a possibility that a force of + Indians was already secreted near the stockade.</p> + <p>No sooner had he begun to pace his beat than Mark realized to what + danger the occupants of the dwelling were exposed in case the + savages had already landed on Mount Desert, for the gate of the + palisade was unlocked and unguarded, and then Susan was sent back to + warn her mother and aunt that the entrance must be secured.</p> + <p id=tn4>When she returned to the shore it was with the report that the gate + was barred on the inside, and Mary Pemberton standing close beside + it in case the sentinels outside should be forced to beat a hasty + retreat. <a href="#t4">4</a></p> + <p>Now indeed had the lad done all within his power to protect those + whom he considered were entrusted to his charge, and it only + remained to keep careful watch for the first show of mischief.</p> + <p>And this came in a manner wholly unexpected, although it seemed to + the young leader as if he had taken into consideration every method + which might be adopted by the savages.</p> + <p>During three hours or more the children had paced to and fro on the + shore, each making certain meanwhile that the other two were on the + alert, and then Mark saw a canoe put off from the harbor island, + heading toward Pulpit Rock, as if to gain the shelter of that + headland before coming to land.</p> + <p>Uttering a low cry to attract the attention of his companions, he + would have hurried on to the point in order to fire at least one + shot before the Indians could disembark; but at that moment an + exclamation from Luke caused him to gaze across the harbor, when he + saw a second canoe setting out toward the northward.</p> + <p>A moment later a third craft was paddled straight across the water, + in the direction of Susan's post of duty.</p> + <p>It seemed certain that the Abenakis understood how small and weak + was the force opposed to them, and therefore, counted on bringing + their bloody work to a speedy conclusion regardless of their + ordinary methods of warfare.</p> + <a id="pic_7"></a><img src="images/dti-7.jpg" alt="[Illustration: Mark saw a canoe put off from the harbor island.]"> + <br> + <p>A landing would be made at three different places simultaneously, + and the young defenders must perforce give all their attention to + one party, leaving the others to do as they pleased, or, by + attempting to guard every point, place themselves in the greatest + possible danger.</p> + <p>"Make ready to run for the house when I give the word," Mark cried + to his companions. "Come this way, Sue, and Luke, do the best you + can at peppering the canoe in front of us!"</p> + <p>Susan speedily joined her cousin on the southerly side of the + harbor, while Luke stood his ground, but with the disagreeable + knowledge that in a few moments the savages would probably be + creeping up behind him.</p> + <p>Now Mark understood that he could not afford to spend many moments + on this portion of the defence. It was necessary the three should be + inside the stockade before those who were landing at either point of + the harbor could come up within range, and he said to Susan:</p> + <p>"We must get in our work quickly, for I reckon these villains in + front of us will take good care to move so slowly as to keep at a + safe distance until the others are ready for work."</p> + <p>For reply the girl raised her musket on the crutch-like rest which + was used in those days, took careful aim, and pulled the trigger.</p> + <p id=tn5>It was possible to see the bullet as it struck the moonlit water, + hardly more than three paces in advance of the canoe, with its + freight of painted terrors, and instantly the Indians ceased + paddling, thus proving that they had no intention of coming within + range until their comrades from the other craft were in position to + prosecute their murderous work. <a href="#t5">5</a></p> + <p>"There is little sense in our staying here," Mark said, bitterly. + "Those scoundrels don't intend to give us any show at them, and we + are foolish if we remain. Yonder canoe put off boldly only to keep + us occupied until the others could make a landing."</p> + <p>"Are we to go back?" Susan asked, striving to prevent a tremor of + fear from being perceptible in her voice.</p> + <p>"Ay, it is high time. You start on ahead, and I'll call Luke."</p> + <p>"I shall walk by your side," the girl said, stoutly. "We will share + the danger equally, as you promised."</p> + <p>"You are a good girl, Sue; just the kind that will do a full half of + the work of defending the island," and Mark kissed her on the cheek + more tenderly than he had ever done before, as one would who was + whispering a final good-bye.</p> + <p id=tn6>"Close in, Luke; we must get back to the house; there's no show of + our being able to do anything here," Mark cried to his brother, as + he set the example by leading Susan in the direction of the stockade. <a href="#t6">6</a></p> + <p>The canoe came forward more swiftly as the little party of children + retreated; but it could be seen that its occupants did not count on + approaching within range, and Mark hastened his brother's movements + by shouting:</p> + <p>"Run for it, lad! We must be in position behind the fence when the + brutes first come within view!"</p> + <p>Then the three went toward the place of refuge at full speed, and + behind the gate, having been warned by the report of her cousin's + musket, Mary Pemberton stood ready to let down the heavy bar when + the little party was near at hand.</p> + <p>The retreat had been begun none too soon, as was seen when the + children came within the enclosure, for while Mark was replacing the + bar which locked the gate, his mother, standing on one of the + improvised platforms, discharged a musket.</p> + <p>"What have you seen?" the lad cried, as, the gate having been + fastened, he ran toward that portion of the stockade where was his + mother.</p> + <p>"An Indian came out just beyond the dead tree, over there."</p> + <p>"Did you hit him?"</p> + <p>"I'm afraid not, Mark; I never could send a bullet straight, and am + now blaming myself for not having practiced more often after your + father insisted that the time might come when I would need to handle + a musket deftly."</p> + <p>By this time Mark stood by his mother's side, peering cautiously out + over the top of the palisade, which was not a simple matter, since + he took the risk of presenting the enemy with a target.</p> + <p>He could see nothing suspicious, and was yet peering eagerly around, + when the report of a musket rang out on the other side of the + stockade.</p> + <p>It was Susan who fired the shot. At the same moment Mark clambered + up beside his mother, the girl had taken her station on one of the + casks at a point overlooking the thicket, and the result showed that + she had arrived there none too soon.</p> + <p>"Did you see an Indian?" Luke asked, as he mounted one of the + wash-benches near the gate.</p> + <p>"Ay, and hit him, too!" Susan replied, grimly, as she turned to + recharge her weapon; but Mistress Harding took the empty musket + from her hands, as she said:</p> + <p>"Your aunt and I cannot shoot as well as you children; but we may, + at least, be of service in loading the guns."</p> + <p>From this moment there was little delay in making the assault. + Contrary to their custom, the Abenakis pressed forward immediately + after the first shot was fired, doubtless hoping to gain an + advantage while the defenders were reloading the weapons, and each + of the three children fired two shots as rapidly as the muskets + could be handed to them.</p> + <p>Three times had a piercing scream followed the report of the weapon, + thus telling that an equal number of bullets had hit the targets, + and then the savages became more cautious.</p> + <p>Until this moment the Indians had not fired a shot; but now the + bullets began to whistle over the heads of those who were exposed to + view, as the Abenakis, themselves screened by the bushes, began the + real attack.</p> + <p>"Be careful of yourselves!" Mark cried, forgetting to set his + companions an example. "Keep down behind the posts as much as + possible; we can count on their staying under cover while doing so + much shooting!" Then, turning to his mother, he added, "There is no + reason why all the children should be out-of-doors, where a stray + bullet may find them. Why not order them into the house?"</p> + <p>This Mistress Pemberton did, and when the younger members of the + company were in comparative safety, Mark looked anxiously around at + his army of two.</p> + <p>Luke was crouching behind the palisade, where a wide crevice between + two of the posts afforded him a view of the outside without his + being obliged to expose himself, and Susan was leaning against the + timbers, only partially sheltered, as she appeared to be tying + something around her arm.</p> + <p>"What are you doing, Sue?" Mark cried, in alarm.</p> + <p>"Standing guard here; but just now I can't see anything that looks + like an Indian."</p> + <p>"What is the matter with your arm?"</p> + <p>"It's only a scratch," the girl replied, in a matter-of-fact tone. + "It bleeds a little, and I've wrapped a piece of my gown around it."</p> + <p>"You're wounded!" Mark cried, and he made as if to jump down from + the platform, when Susan said, sharply:</p> + <p>"Stay where you are! Even though I was hurt badly, which I'm not, + you have no right to leave the fence unguarded."</p> + <p>Mark stepped back with a certain sense of shame that it had been + necessary for Susan to remind him of his duty, and then Mistress + Harding went to her daughter's side.</p> + <p>"It is a slight wound on the left arm," the good woman said, after + insisting on an examination of the injury. "I will take her to the + house while I tie it up properly, and Ellen may stand here in her + place."</p> + <p>"But Ellen can't use a musket as well as I, and we're needed here," + Susan cried, more concerned lest she be forced to leave her station + at the palisade than on account of the wound.</p> + <p>Mistress Harding might have insisted on her daughter's going into + the building if at that moment the assault had not been renewed, and + during the next ten minutes the defenders were actively employed.</p> + <p>The Indians, profiting by the teachings and example of the + Frenchmen, whose allies they were, had divided the force, a portion + remaining hidden in the thicket to fire at the children, while the + remainder made a rush for the gate, as if believing it might be + forced open.</p> + <p>Now it was that the defenders were obliged to move quickly, and it + was impossible for them to remain under cover all the while.</p> + <p>"Pour all the fire into those fellows who are coming up with the + log!" Mark cried, as half a dozen Abenakis, carrying a heavy + tree-trunk, to be used as a battering-ram, made ready to advance at + full speed.</p> + <p>This command was obeyed with such good effect that three of the + savages fell, and their fellows, dropping the timber, ran to cover + with the greatest possible haste.</p> + <p id=tn7>At the same moment the children fired, the Indians in hiding + discharged their weapons, detonations being echoed and reëchoed + from mountain to mountain, until it sounded as if a severe + engagement was in progress. <a href="#t7">7</a></p> + <p id=tn8>"Any one hurt?" Mark cried, and Susan and Luke replied cheerily in + the negative. <a href="#t8">8</a></p> + <p>One of the three Indians wounded while advancing with the tree-trunk + succeeded in crawling off to the shelter of the underbrush; but the + other two remained where they had fallen.</p> + <p>When, two or three minutes later, an Abenakis darted out from his + place of concealment, Mark raised his weapon quickly; but Susan + cried, warningly:</p> + <p>"Don't fire! It can do us no harm if they take away the wounded, and + it's possible they'll go back to the harbor island, if the injured + can be carried off!"</p> + <p>"I'm beginning to think it is you who should be in command here," + Mark said, half to himself, as he lowered his weapon. "You've got + more sound sense than Luke and I together." Then, raising his voice, + he cried, loudly, "Listen, ye Abenakis, whom our fathers have fed + when you were hungry, and sheltered when you were cold, but who + would murder us now! Take away your wounded, if you are minded to go + back to the harbor island, and no one shall harm you while so doing. + The white men of Mount Desert have never broken faith with you, nor + will we, their children."</p> + <p>Then was done that which proves how much stranger than fiction is + truth. The Abenakis, although they had come there to kill or make + prisoners the wives and children of those men who had ever been + their friends, did not question the faith of the lad when he + announced that they might bear off the wounded in safety, but boldly + advanced within short range to the aid of their fellows.</p> + <p>"Why do you seek to kill us, who have never done you harm?" Mark + cried, when four of the band stood in full view while lifting the + wounded from the ground. "Do Indians kill their friends? Do they + speak soft words only while the men of the family are at home, being + too cowardly to make an attack until the fathers have gone away?"</p> + <p>There was no reply to this speech until the Indians were hidden once + more by the bushes, and then a voice cried:</p> + <p>"Give us the cow and two boys. Then we will go away, telling the + Frenchmen that all have been killed."</p> + <p>"You shall not have the smallest chicken inside this stockade!" Mark + cried, angrily. "And I promise that there shall be few left to + report to the cowardly Frenchmen, if you remain here very long. You + shall be shot down like dogs, and from this out our squaws will not + interfere to let you carry off those who have been crippled!"</p> + <p>While speaking, Mark had unconsciously raised himself to his full + height, instead of being partially sheltered by remaining in a + crouching position, as during the short fight, and the reply to his + words came in the form of bullets, one of which grazed his cheek, + raising a red ridge, as if he had been scored by a whip-lash.</p> + <p>Susan and Luke both fired in the direction from which had been seen + the flash of the muskets, but no one could say if the missiles thus + sent at random took effect.</p> + <p>Five minutes later, while the watchers still gazed through the + crevices of the palisade, believing the enemy to be near at hand, a + canoe was seen putting off from the shore, directly in front of the + dwellings, and, after such delay as was necessary, in order to + enable them to reach the other craft, all three divisions of the + attacking force were headed for the harbor island.</p> + <a id="pic_8"></a><img src="images/dti-8.jpg" alt="[Illustration: You shall not have the smallest chicken inside this stockade!]"> + <br> + <p>The first assault had been made, and successfully resisted. It now + remained to be seen whether the Abenakis were willing to accept this + as defeat, of if new tactics were to be tried.</p> + <p>"They've gone!" Susan cried, joyfully. "We've beaten them!"</p> + <p>"Yes child," her mother said, despondently, "and if they had not + been sent by Frenchmen, we might believe the worst was over."</p> + <p>"Do you think they'll come back, Mark?" the girl cried, as she + leaped down from her post of duty.</p> + <p>"Ay, that I do, Susan, and for the very reason aunt has given. If we + could only know what the next move would be! I have heard father say + that once upon a time the English drove away from Mount Desert + French settlers, and now those who are stirring the Indians up to + this kind of business are trying to make things even. We can count + on having peace during the rest of the night, I believe, and the + sooner you go into the house, were that wound of yours can be looked + after, the better I shall be pleased."</p> + <p>Indeed, there was no good reason why all the defenders, save one to + stand guard behind the palisade, should not get such repose as might + be had under the circumstances.</p> + <p>A sentinel, on one of the hastily constructed platforms, could keep + the harbor island well in view, therefore the savages would not be + able to leave it secretly, and Mark proposed that he remain on duty + for a certain time, while the others slept.</p> + <p>"You shall have my place in a couple of hours, Luke." the lad said + to his brother.</p> + <p>"And when do I take my turn?" Susan asked, showing that she was + determined to do a full share in the defence, regardless of her + wound.</p> + <p>"You may stand guard when it is time for Luke to lie down," Mark + replied, intending that she should not be awakened if he could + prevent it.</p> + <a href="#toc">Return to Contents</a> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <div class=center id=III><h3>CHAPTER III<br>A DAY OF SUSPENSE</h3></div> + <br> + <p>While Mark stood on guard, able to see the entire broad expanse of + water, thanks to the light of the moon, he knew that so long as a + careful watch was kept the Abenakis could not leave the harbor + island secretly; but he also realized that if the clouds should + gather, or a fog settle down over the waters, then, of a verity, + would they be at the mercy of a foe from whom no mercy could be + expected.</p> + <p>The fact that they had been able to resist the first assault did not + give him encouragement for the future. The Indians had advanced + foolishly, understanding that the white people knew full well what + they were about, and after this first repulse it was reasonable to + suppose the murderous scoundrels would bring all their cunning into + play when the next attack was made.</p> + <p>There were six muskets in the stockade, and ammunition sufficient to + last during an ordinary siege, provided none was wasted, yet but + three persons—Susan, Luke, and himself—could be depended upon to + man the walls. The others would have served faithfully, of that + there was no question; but none of them were so expert with a musket + as to be counted on for any great execution.</p> + <p>Although the lad would not have admitted as much to either of his + companions, the fear in his heart that the enemy might succeed in + accomplishing his purpose was very great.</p> + <p>"We can count on it that at the next attack they will succeed in + getting inside the palisade," he said, unconsciously giving words to + his thoughts, and he started almost in alarm as a familiar voice + behind him asked, reproachfully:</p> + <p>"If you lose heart, how can the rest of us be expected to show + courage?"</p> + <p>"What are you doing out here, Sue?" he asked, in turn, not minded to + answer her question, if it could be avoided.</p> + <p>"I've come to take Luke's place. He is sleeping so soundly that it + is a pity to awaken him, and the pain in my arm keeps my eyes open + very wide."</p> + <p>"But I haven't been here two hours yet."</p> + <p>"Nearly half that time has passed since you came on duty, and there + is no reason why you should remain awake when it's impossible for me + to sleep. I can keep a sharp watch."</p> + <p>"So you can, Sue; but it is my place to take the biggest end, and I + don't fancy the idea of letting a woman do my work."</p> + <p>"If I could go to sleep it would be different; but since I can't, I + shall stay here, therefore you might as well take advantage of the + opportunity."</p> + <p>Mark made no move toward leaving the platform, from which he could + have a full view of the harbor, and, seeing that he was not disposed + to act upon her suggestion, Susan clambered up beside him.</p> + <p>"Now tell me what you meant by saying that the next time they come + the Indians will get inside the fence?"</p> + <p>"There's no sense in talking about that. I didn't count on speaking + aloud."</p> + <p>"You did, however, and now it will be treating me no more than + fairly if you tell me exactly what is in your mind."</p> + <p>Mark had no desire to discuss the situation just then, when it + looked very dark to him, and, in order to avoid answering the + question, he proposed to take advantage of Susan's proposition.</p> + <p>"Since you are determined to stay here, I may as well get what sleep + I can. Call Luke when you are tired," He said, and before she could + detain him he had slipped down from the improvised platform, walking + rapidly toward the dwelling.</p> + <p>The girl could do guard duty as well as either of her cousins, and + was eager to perform a full share of the labor devolving upon those + who were striving to hold the savages in check. Perhaps she + magnified the pain of her wound in order to be allowed to take + Mark's place, and, if such was the case, the defence would be in no + wise weakened through her.</p> + <p>Until the first faint light of a new day could be seen did Susan + Harding stand on the narrow platform, watching eagerly for any signs + of life from the harbor island, and unable to change her position, + save by taking two or three paces to the right or left. Even then + she would have remained on duty longer, but that Mark came hurriedly + out of the house crying, angrily:</p> + <p>"It was not fair for you to stay on watch all night, Sue! You the + same as promised to call Luke when you were tired."</p> + <p>"I didn't really agree, and I'm not tired yet. There's no need of + your coming up here, for now that it is daylight, Ellen can be + trusted to keep a lookout over the island."</p> + <p>"When she has eaten her breakfast I will let her take my place," + Mark replied, as he literally forced the girl to descend, and a few + moments later all the occupants of the stockade were astir.</p> + <p>The cows were milked, but kept within the enclosure, the young boys + feeding and watering them. The hens were allowed to stray here or + there at will, and, save for the sentinels on the palisade, one + might have thought that the scene presented there represented + perfect peace and happiness.</p> + <p>When the morning meal had been prepared, Ellen Harding took Mark's + station on the stockade, being enjoined by him to keep her eyes + fixed constantly on the harbor island, without heeding what might be + happening around her, as the little company gathered in the + Pemberton house, where thanks were given for their preservation + during the night.</p> + <p>While breakfast was in progress no reference was made to the danger + which menaced; it seemed as if the women feared to alarm the younger + children, and the three to whom the defence of the island had been + committed were not desirous of starting a conversation which might + lead up to the possibilities of the future.</p> + <p>Susan was forced to submit to a second treatment of her wound, as + soon as the meal had had come to an end, and Mistress Harding + peremptorily insisted on her going to bed, since she had not closed + her eyes in slumber during the night just passed.</p> + <p>Mistress Pemberton set about melting lead for bullets, the store of + missiles being smaller than that of powder, and Mark and Luke went + out to make a more thorough examination of the palisade.</p> + <p>"It isn't very likely that the Abenakis will make any move during + this day," the elder lad said, "and while Ellen is standing watch it + would be wicked to lose any chance of making our position yet more + secure."</p> + <p>Luke was ready to act upon his brother's suggestion, but appeared to + have no desire for conversation, and Mark did not urge him to talk, + for the same reason that had caused him to hold his peace during the + breakfast hour.</p> + <p>There was much that had been overlooked during the hurry and + excitement of the previous day, which could be done to strengthen + the palisade, as, for example, driving stakes at the foot of such + posts as were not standing firmly, and securing the tops of others + with braces on the inside.</p> + <p>In order to do a portion of this work, it was necessary the lads + should go into the thicket for material; but while Ellen remained on + watch to give the alarm, in case she saw any signs of life on the + harbor island, they did not hesitate to leave the stockade.</p> + <p>It was while they were chopping down small trees in the rear of the + dwellings, that the flock of fourteen sheep came in sight, and these + Mark decided to drive into the enclosure.</p> + <p>It would be a serious blow to the settlers if these wool-growers + should be killed by the enemy, for it might be a difficult task to + replace them, and without the fleeces each summer the children would + be destitute of materials for clothing.</p> + <p>By catching the leader of the flock, and dragging him along by the + horns, the lads had little trouble in getting the animals within the + stockade, and Mark announced his success by saying, in a tone of + mild triumph:</p> + <p>"The family is all behind one fence now, and unless the Abenakis get + inside, they can't do us a great deal of harm."</p> + <p>"But the sheep will pull heavily on our store of hay," Luke + suggested, and his brother replied, cheerily:</p> + <p>"They can pick up a good bit around the place, and it won't do any + very great harm to let them go hungry now and then. It's better than + taking good chances of losing the whole drove."</p> + <p>There was no further discussion as to the advisability of bringing + the sheep into the stockade, for at that moment a cry from Ellen + caused both the boys to run, with all speed, to her side.</p> + <p>"Look! Look! A vessel! It must be that fishermen are coming here, + and now the Indians will be driven away!"</p> + <a id="pic_9"></a><img src="images/dti-9.jpg" alt="[Illustration: Look! Look! A vessel!]"> + <br> + <p>To their great surprise and delight, the boys saw a small schooner, + coming as if from the mainland on the northward, heading directly + for the harbor island.</p> + <p>"We're saved, God be thanked!" Mark cried, in a tone so loud as to + be heard by the inmates of the house, all of whom came swiftly + toward him to learn the cause of the fervent exclamation.</p> + <p>"What is it, my son?" Mistress Pemberton asked, sharply, and Luke + shouted, as he pointed seaward:</p> + <p>"A fishing-vessel, mother, and those on board must soon know that + the Indians are besieging us!"</p> + <p>"But she appears to be going directly to the harbor island! The crew + should be warned, lest the Abenakis make an attack upon them!"</p> + <p>This possibility had not entered Mark's mind; but while his mother + was yet speaking he darted out of the stockade, running with all + speed to the shore, waving his arms and shouting, to attract the + attention of the newcomers.</p> + <p>He was followed by the two families, including Susan, who had been + awakened by the joyful cries, and the little party ran swiftly along + the beach until they were come to the nearest point of the island, + which was the small bluff, or incline, on the westernmost end.</p> + <p>Here it was possible to have in view the schooner's deck, and that + their signals had been seen seemed positive, although no attention + was taken of them.</p> + <p>"Had you not better pull out in the small boat?" Mistress Pemberton + asked of Mark, when the strangers failed to pay any heed to the + gestures of warning. "It would be dreadful if the men went on shore + and were murdered!"</p> + <p>There seemed to be no reason why the lads should not visit the + vessel, and, in fact, such an idea had entered Mark's mind before + his mother spoke, but yet he hesitated to act upon her suggestion, + although it would have been impossible for him to explain why he + remained idle.</p> + <p>"The schooner carries a big crew for a fisherman," Susan said, + thoughtfully. "There must be as many as twenty-five or thirty on her + deck."</p> + <p>"She's no fisherman!" Mark cried, becoming perplexed as he observed + the truth of what Susan had said. "So many people never could work + on a craft of that size."</p> + <p>"But what else can she be?" Luke asked, curiously, "I don't know as + it makes much difference to us, though, so long as she carries a + crew of white people. Why don't we pull out to her, Mark? Look, + she's coming to anchor, and if her crew lands without knowing of the + Abenakis, they will all be killed!"</p> + <p>"There are the Indians!" Susan cried, as three canoes, filled with + savages, were seen putting out from the shore.</p> + <p>"They are going to make an attack on the vessel, and we can do + nothing to help the poor people!" Mistress Pemberton cried, in an + agony of grief, while an expression of terror overspread Mark's face + as he began to have an inkling of the true situation.</p> + <p>"Can't you boys do something to aid the men?" Mistress Harding + asked, and Mark replied:</p> + <p>"It isn't likely they're needing any help. Those on the vessel + outnumber the Abenakis three to one, and I'm afraid they won't have + any trouble in taking care of themselves."</p> + <p>No one save Susan gave any particular heed to Mark's words, but + watched with feverish interest as the canoes approached the vessel, + and then, when the Indians clambered aboard without any attempt + being made to prevent them, the expression of the face of the + spectators changed from that of sympathy to perplexity.</p> + <p>"The Abenakis seem to know the fishermen," Mistress Pemberton said + to herself, and Mark replied, bitterly:</p> + <p>"Ay, mother, that they do, and now, instead of being called upon to + defend ourselves against Indians only, we shall have that crowd of + Frenchmen against us!"</p> + <p>"God forbid that white people could attack women and children!" + Mistress Harding cried fervently, and Mark added:</p> + <p id=tn9>"He hasn't forbidden it so far, aunt. Don't you remember what father + and uncle heard from those aboard of the last vessel they spoke + with? They were told that when Master Peabody and his wife were + murdered, there were ten French soldiers with the Indians." <a href="#t9">9</a></p> + <p>"Can it be that they have come to aid the savages against us?" and + Mistress Harding's face grew pale.</p> + <p>"Ay, that is the way the French king fights us in this country, and + if we are murdered it will be because his agents have decided upon + it in revenge for that which was done here so many years ago to the + missionaries!"</p> + <p>And now while the little party of besieged stands on the shore + facing this new and unexpected peril, suppose we set down that + which Mr. Williamson wrote in his "History of Maine."</p> + <p>"A communication was received at Boston in August, 1758, from + Brigadier-General Monkton, stationed in Nova Scotia, which stated + that a body of Frenchmen, in conjunction with the Indians of the + rivers St. John, Penobscot, and probably Passamaquoddy, were + meditating an attempt upon the fort at St. Georges, and the + destruction of all the settlements on the coast."</p> + <p>"Immediately Governor Pownal collected such a military force as was + at command, and embarked with them on board the King George, and the + sloop Massachusetts. Arriving, he threw these auxiliaries with some + warlike stores into the fort at a most fortunate juncture; for + within thirty-six hours after the departure the fort was actually + assailed by a body of four hundred French and Indians."</p> + <p id=tn10>"But so well prepared was the garrison to receive them, that they + were unable to make the least impression. Nor did any + representations of their numbers, nor any threats, communicated to + the fort by a captive woman, whom they purposely permitted to escape + hither, occasion the least alarm. Hence, the besiegers gave vent to + their resentiments and rage by killing the neighboring cattle, about + sixty of which they shot or butchered." <a href="#t10">10</a></p> + <p>It was well for the little families who were so sorely beset that + they remained in ignorance of what the French assisted by the + Indians of several tribes, were trying to do, otherwise their + despair would have been even greater than it was as they watched + the reception of the Abenakis by those on board the schooner.</p> + <p>It will never be known whether this attack on Mount Desert was made + in revenge for what had been done by Argall to the French + missionaries; but certain it was that all the settlements on the + coast, large or small, had been marked for destruction under the + guise of legitimate warfare.</p> + <p>During five minutes or more, while the besieged watched the + movements on the deck of the schooner until there was no longer any + question but that the number of their enemies had been largely + increased, not a word was spoken, and then Mistress Harding broke + the painful stillness by exclaiming:</p> + <p>"There is nothing left us to do but submit! With French soldiers at + hand, it is not probable the savages will be allowed to murder their + prisoners, and to surrender the island is better than being killed!"</p> + <p>"The French have never done anything toward preventing the Indians + from working their will on the helpless captives. Do you remember + the story father tells of Falmouth, when these same Frenchmen + pledged their words of honor that no blood should be spilled, and + yet many of those who surrendered were murdered in cold blood?"</p> + <p>"But what other can we do save give ourselves up?" Mistress Harding + cried, helplessly, and Susan stepped proudly by the side of Mark, as + he replied, stoutly:</p> + <p>"We can fight to the last, and die with muskets in our hands, + instead of going willingly to meet the scalping-knife or the + tomahawk. It may be that those on the mainland will learn what is + being done here, and come to our relief."</p> + <p>"Do not put faith in such a possibility, my son. It is better to + face the worst than build on hopes which must be dashed," and + Mistress Pemberton laid her hand on Mark's shoulder as if in pride + because of the courage he displayed. "We will do battle against + these people, white and red, and when our best has been done, the + end will be no worse than if we submitted tamely."</p> + <p>"That's the way to put it!" Mark cried, kissing his mother's hand. + "We had planned to defend ourselves against the savages, and now let + us see what shall be done since they have had such a large + reinforcement. Certain it is that we must not stand here, for they + may have muskets aboard the schooner which will carry a ball farther + than ours."</p> + <p>Mistress Pemberton led the way back to the stockade, and there, in + the open air near the gateway where a close watch might be kept over + both the island and the vessel, she commended the little party to + the care of Him who watches over even the sparrow's fall.</p> + <p>It was to the distressed company as if the entire situation had been + suddenly changed; as if their means of defence were totally + inadequate, leaving them to the mercy of the French and Indians, who + were making the attack simply because the King of England and the + King of France had sundry differences of opinion, which might be + settled by spilling the blood of innocent people.</p> + <p>Susan, who had been the most courageous, seemed to have grown + timorous when she asked, while she and Mark were where the words + could not be overheard:</p> + <p>"What shall we do? Is there any hope we can hold back such a force + as is being arrayed against us?"</p> + <p>"It doesn't seem possible, Sue, and yet we must fight to the last, + rather than give over our mothers and you girls to what we know will + follow if we show the white feather."</p> + <p>"I am not afraid of your ever doing anything of that kind, Mark," + and the girl laid her hand on his shoulder with a loving gesture. + "You will always be brave and true; but what I am asking is whether + we may do anything which, as yet, has not been tried."</p> + <p>"I exhausted all my ideas in arranging for a defence against the + Abenakis, and now we must stand up like images, fighting until we + are destroyed. Anything is better than tame surrender, when we know + by the terrible experiences of others what will follow."</p> + <p>"In that I am of your mind, Mark, dear; but I am asking if there + isn't something else, which, as yet, we have neglected, that can be + done. Our mothers depend on you, as do I, which is only natural, + since you are the eldest, and should of right take your father's + place."</p> + <p>"It is just that, Sue dear, which causes me to be afraid of my own + ideas. If I make a mistake, it may be fatal to you all, for you will + follow my advice."</p> + <p>"That is true, Mark, and yet you should not be timid because of it, + for you are best fitted to act the part of leader, and we know full + well you will only do that which seems safest."</p> + <p>"Are you agreed that we cannot surrender?" and Mark asked the + question in an angry tone, as if expecting she would refuse to view + the situation in the same light he did.</p> + <p>"Of course I am. Could I say otherwise after all the stories we have + heard from the mainland?"</p> + <p>"Then we must fight?"</p> + <p>"Of course, and to the last. I would rather see mother and the + children killed by musket-balls, than to have them fall unharmed + into the hands of those who await us there," and she motioned toward + the harbor island. "How long can we hold the stockade against such a + force?"</p> + <p>"Four and twenty hours, it may be, and a much shorter time if you, + or Luke, or I should be killed early in the fight."</p> + <p>"And we will hope that our fathers do not come back until all is + over."</p> + <p>"Ay, Sue dear, that is what we must hope, unless we would have them + come in time to meet their death. Two more men on the stockade would + not greatly prolong the struggle, and I fail to see how they, + without other aid, could help us very much."</p> + <p>"If it should be, Mark dear, that I am wounded again, will you see + to it that the Indians do not take me prisoner?"</p> + <p>"Ay, Sue, though the moment will be a terrible one when I turn my + musket against you; but it shall be done."</p> + <p>"And if you are left until the last you will see that the children + are not taken alive?"</p> + <p>"If I am left, Sue dear, it shall be as the last of our families on + the island, for I believe death is more pleasant than can be life in + the hands of such as those who are counting soon to hold us in their + power."</p> + <p>Then the two children kissed each other as if in a last farewell, + and Mark, trying to assume a careless air, said, with a feeble + attempt at a smile:</p> + <p>"Since you were the last to awaken, it is no more than fair you + should be among the first on duty. You, Luke, and I will stand guard + alone until the attack is made, as we can count it will be this + night, and then our mothers must charge the muskets. Remember, Sue + dear, that I haven't yet despaired of holding the whole wicked crew + in check. It doesn't seem possible that God would withhold His hand + while we are being beaten."</p> + <p>"And yet it has been that many people in this country, whose cause + was as just as ours, have been overcome by the same merciless foe + who await us."</p> + <p>"Ay, Sue, and since we can only take what comes as stoutly as decent + English people should, we'll seem to be brave, however timorous our + hearts may become when the last moment is at hand."</p> + <p>Then these two children, striving to fill the places of their + parents, began that vigil which both believed would be ended with + their death.</p> + <p>Mark made the announcement to his mother and aunt, after the gate + had been shut and closely barred, that they and the children should + remain in the dwelling until the moment came when they could be of + assistance in loading the weapons, and in the meanwhile the task of + guarding the stockade would devolve upon his brother, cousin, and + himself.</p> + <p>"We are not so much worse off than before, except that many more + will come against us," he said, as the women and children went + toward the Pemberton house. "We shall fight until the last, and, if + God is kind, it may be we can hold the villains in check four and + twenty hours, if no more. Get what rest you can, and remember that + tears are of no avail when bullets are needed."</p> + <a href="#toc">Return to Contents</a> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <div class=center id=IV><h3>CHAPTER IV.<br>AN ATTACK</h3></div> + <br> + <p>When the women and smaller children were inside the dwelling, Mark + said to his companions:</p> + <p>"It is better to have something in the way of work on hand than + remain idle, and it has come into my mind that we might improve our + condition if we raised the top of the stockade so that we could + stand on the platforms without being seen by those outside."</p> + <p>"How would you set about it?" Luke asked, with mild curiosity.</p> + <p>"A heavy timber might be made fast to the top of the palisade, and, + by making loopholes between the upper ends of the logs, we would be + hidden from view, and at the same time be able to keep watch."</p> + <p>"Do you count that we should go after logs, taking the chances that + the enemy will make a landing right away?"</p> + <p>"I intend to go alone, while you and Susan stand guard. Shout if you + see a single boat putting off from the harbor island, and then I can + get inside the enclosure before the enemy will be able to paddle + over here."</p> + <p>Mark did not wait to learn if his companions had any criticism to + make on his proposition, but set off in search of the axe without + delay, and the others had no choice but to mount guard.</p> + <a id="pic_10"></a><img src="images/dti-10.jpg" alt="[Illustration: He returned with a heavy log.]"> + <br> + <p>When the lad went through the gate he directed that it be barred + behind him, lest there might be Indians in the thicket, and a few + moments later it was possible to hear the sound of his sturdy blows + as he felled the trees.</p> + <p>In less than half an hour he returned with a heavy log that had been + squared on one side, and, after having been given admittance, he + laid this on the posts above the platform on which Susan was + stationed. By chopping either side of the uprights, close to the + top, he made V-shaped apertures of sufficient size to admit of a + musket-barrel being thrust through, thus forming five or six + loopholes for the sentinel.</p> + <p>Therefore it was one could remain on the platform without being + exposed to view of the enemy directly in front, and such shelter + would be of great value to the defenders while the attacking party + was a short distance away.</p> + <p>By means of wooden pins Mark secured the log in place, although not + very firmly, and the three children who were to defend the stockade + believed their position had been decidedly strengthened by such a + device.</p> + <p>Another hour was spent in felling trees, fitting the timbers, and + putting them in place. Then Mark occupied himself with making a + careful examination of every portion of the palisade, after which, + he said, with a long-drawn sigh:</p> + <p>"I can think of nothing else that is likely to improve the defences, + and it only remains to wait until the enemy is ready to begin + operations. What has been done aboard the schooner?"</p> + <p>"Many of the men have gone ashore on the harbor island," Luke + replied. "The sails are furled, and everything snugged down as if + for a long stay."</p> + <p>"Have you seen the Abenakis?"</p> + <p>"Two or three of them yet remain aboard the schooner; but the larger + number are on shore."</p> + <p>Then Mark clambered up on one of the platforms, straining his eyes + to learn what the strangers were doing with the hope of being able + to make some guess as to when another attack would be made; but in + this last he was unsuccessful. The men were lounging on the vessel, + or ashore, as if their only purpose was to pass the time pleasantly, + and utterly heedless as to whether they were seen by those inside + the stockade.</p> + <p>"Whoever is in command of the Frenchmen will direct the next + assault," Mark said, sufficiently loud to be heard by his companions + at their several posts of duty. "It is known that we count on + defending ourselves, and we may expect to see the entire force + before us within the coming ten or twelve hours."</p> + <p>"What about the powder?" Luke asked.</p> + <p>"We have none too much; but enough, I believe, if we are careful in + making every shot count, to last us during two assaults. After that, + if we're alive, there'll be a short allowance."</p> + <p>"A boat is putting off from the schooner, and heading this way," + Susan announced, and the boys gave no further heed as to + speculations regarding the future, for it seemed as if the enemy was + about to begin operations.</p> + <p>In a very short time, however, it could be understood that there was + no danger of an immediate attack, for the craft coming shoreward + from the vessel was a canoe in which were but three men.</p> + <p>The sentinels were unable to understand the meaning of this + movement. It did not seem probable the enemy counted on boldly + reconnoitering the island, nor was it reasonable to suppose any + attack was to be made with so small a force, and Mark said, in + perplexity:</p> + <p>"I can't make out why they are coming; but we'll be ready for + whatever turn affairs may take."</p> + <p>"Shall we fire on them if they get too near?" Susan asked.</p> + <p>"Unless they claim to be friends, which isn't likely, we'll treat + them exactly as we would the Abenakis, if they were bold enough to + land in broad day," Mark replied, and, as assurance of his + intentions, he made certain his musket was ready for immediate use.</p> + <p>The strangers paddled directly toward the spot where were kept the + boats of the settlers, beached the canoe, and straightway approached + the stockade, as friends might have done.</p> + <p>The three children on guard watched the newcomers curiously, until + they were within fifty or sixty paces of the gate, and then Mark + hailed:</p> + <p>"It will be safer to halt where you are until we understand the + reason for this visit," he cried, showing himself above the + palisade, with musket in hand.</p> + <p>"Are you in command of the stockade?" one of the visitors asked, as + all three came to a full stop.</p> + <p>"Ay, for the time being."</p> + <p>"How many have you in garrison?" one of the newcomers asked, as he + advanced a single pace, to show that he was authorized to act as + spokesman for his party.</p> + <p>"That is for you to find out," Mark replied, with a smile. "You must + take us for simples, if it is in your mind that we will give all the + information demanded."</p> + <p>"I did not ask to gain information, for we know exactly the number + of women and children here. I desired that you yourself should state + it in order to the better understand how entirely you are at our + mercy," The man said, and his manner of speech told that he was + French.</p> + <p>"I do not need to repeat it, having seen your force, and knowing my + own full well."</p> + <p>"Then you can understand that when I offer good quarter if you + surrender without resistance, it should do away with any necessity + for a conflict."</p> + <p>"Are you ready to give the same quarter your people promised at + Falmouth, when the defenceless prisoners were murdered by you + Frenchmen?" Mark cried, angrily.</p> + <p>"I give you my word of honor as a soldier, than no one shall be + harmed if you surrender this place immediately," the officer + replied, sharply.</p> + <p>"If I have heard rightly, the Baron de Castine gave the same pledge + at Falmouth, and afterward excused himself by saying that he could + not restrain the Indian allies," Mark said, stoutly. "Since then it + is difficult to believe that French officers have any too much + honor; otherwise, perhaps, they would not fight side by side with + savages."</p> + <p>"Do you refuse to surrender?" the visitor asked, angrily.</p> + <a id="pic_11"></a><img src="images/dti-11.jpg" alt="[Illustration: Do you refuse to surrender?]"> + <br> + <p>"Ay, that I do, and all here are of the same mind with me. It is + better to die fighting than be put to the torture by your allies, + whom, mayhap, you could not restrain."</p> + <p>"My force is so large that you will be crushed in a twinkling, and, + if you resist, no mercy may be expected. I have come in the effort + to save your lives."</p> + <p>"Why should it be necessary?" Mark asked. "What have we done that + you strive to take possession of our homes?"</p> + <p>"That is not a question to be discussed," the officer replied, + impatiently. "It is my intention to clear this island of settlers, + and I hope at such time to aid you."</p> + <p>"It is a brave piece of business to wait until our fathers have gone + away, and then come here to fight women and children!" Susan cried, + sharply. "Are all French officers so valiant?"</p> + <p>It was impossible for the visitor to see the speaker; but he knew + from the voice that the words were uttered by a girl, and his face + reddened, as he bit his lip to hold back a retort.</p> + <p>"I offer you good quarter, and to that pledge my word, if you submit + at once," he said, after a brief pause. "In case you are so foolish + as to dream of holding out against us, much loss of blood must + ensue."</p> + <p>"That is bound to come," Mark replied, gravely. "We are resolved to + hold this stockade as long as there is one left alive to fire a + musket, and when you succeed in the noble work of murdering women + and children, there will be none left alive for the savages, your + very good friends, to torture."</p> + <p>"And that is your last word?" the officer asked, half-turning on his + heel.</p> + <p>"The last," Mark replied.</p> + <p>The Frenchman stood irresolutely while one might have counted ten, + and then, wheeling about, he marched toward the shore, looking back + from time to time as if believing the young defenders might repent + of having given such an answer.</p> + <p>"We have shut off all chance of making a bargain with them," Luke + said, half to himself, and Susan replied, stoutly:</p> + <p>"It would have shamed me had Mark treated with them! Why should they + offer us quarter? We have done nothing to warrant their making an + attack upon us, and it is well they should hear the truth—that it + is nothing less than murder. People don't make war in such a fashion + as this!"</p> + <p>Mark gave no heed to what his companions were saying. His eyes were + fixed on the canoe, in which the three men had embarked, and it was + in his mind that when they regained the schooner there would be a + decided change in the position of affairs.</p> + <p>And in this he was not mistaken; within half an hour the boats + belonging to the schooner, and the canoes of the Indians, were + engaged in transporting the men to the shore of Mount Desert, half a + mile or more north of the stockade.</p> + <p>"There's one satisfaction to be had in arousing the Frenchman's + temper," Mark said, grimly, when the work of disembarkation was well + under way. "We won't need to expect a night attack, and hang around + in suspense waiting for it, because the assault is to be begun some + time before sunset. We had best get out our supply of ammunition, + and warn the others that they will soon be needed."</p> + <p>It was Susan who went to summon her mother and aunt, and when she + returned, carrying a heavy burden of powder and bullets, it was to + report:</p> + <p>"The children are to be kept in the house, under charge of Ellen. + The others will be here in a minute or two." + </p> + <p>"They can't come any too soon," Luke said, nervously. "The Frenchmen + are already marching along the shore, with the Abenakis trailing on + behind."</p> + <p>Susan was at her post of duty in a twinkling, and, looking out + through the rough loopholes, she saw no less than twenty white men, + ten of whom were armed with muskets, and the others carrying pikes, + the head of which glittered in the sun, marching in soldierly array + down the beach. In their rear slouched nine Indians, and it was safe + to assume that the remainder of the red-skinned party had been + disabled during the first assault.</p> + <p>It was a positive relief to Mark when he saw that the enemy was + intending to march directly upon the stockade, most likely counting + on carrying the place by the first assault. If the force had been + divided, so that a portion might attack from the rear at the same + time the others were in front, the task of holding them in check + would have been well-nigh hopeless.</p> + <p>Even as it was, with everything in the children's favor, it did not + seem possible they could defend themselves against such a force; but + Mark said, as if believing the chances for success were very good:</p> + <p>"Remember that we can't afford to waste any bullets. If each of us + could hit the target three times in succession, I warrant you those + valiant Frenchmen would be eager to gain the shelter of their + vessel. Both of you can strike four squirrels out of five at fifty + paces, and surely you should be able to do as well when the mark is + so much larger and moving slowly. Don't shoot until you are certain + of hitting your man, and we'll soon see those fellow's backs."</p> + <p>Mistress Pemberton and Mistress Harding had come to do their share + in the one-sided battle. Both the women looked pale and distressed, + as was but natural under the desperate circumstances; but a single + glance at their faces would have told that they believed the only + course to be a stout resistance, even though it should cost the + lives of all.</p> + <p>At the shore, directly in front of the stockade, the Indians forced + a halt of the white men, by seemingly insisting that some other + method of procedure be adopted, and during two or three minutes it + appeared as if they would carry their point.</p> + <p>Mark drew a long breath of relief, however, when the officer who had + demanded the surrender pushed his way past the savages with a + threatening gesture, as he ordered the men forward again.</p> + <p>"They are coming straight on in a body," he said, in a low tone. + "When you are certain of hitting the mark, shoot, and have the + second musket where it can be got at quickly. If we could get in six + fair shots at the start, it would be a big advantage."</p> + <p>Each of the children on the platforms had two muskets loaded, and + the women stood ready to take every weapon as soon as it was empty. + The ammunition, divided into three portions, was near the + sharpshooters, and nothing remained to be done save take part in the + life or death struggle so near at hand.</p> + <p>Steadily the French marched toward the stockade, evidently intending + to begin the attack near the gate, and it was Susan who fired the + first shot.</p> + <p>As the report of her musket rang out, one of the foremost men + plunged forward to the ground, and five seconds later Mark brought + another of the enemy down.</p> + <p>Luke fired, but failed of doing execution. He seized the second + musket hurriedly, however, and crippled his foe, thus doing half as + much as Mark had required.</p> + <p>"Three down in four shots isn't so bad!" the leader cried, + encouragingly, and the words were hardly more than spoken before + both he and Susan fired the second time, each of the bullets finding + its billet.</p> + <p>Now it was that the Frenchmen halted without the word of command, + and opened fire.</p> + <p>During three or four minutes it was as if a perfect hail-storm of + lead raged around the stockade, but the stout logs afforded good + protection. Never a missile found its way inside, and the spirits of + the besieged rose rapidly.</p> + <p>Acting under Mark's orders, neither Susan nor Luke had attempted to + make reply to the furious shooting, lest a bullet accidentally come + through one of the loopholes, and when, because their weapons were + empty, the soldiers ceased the aimless firing, the children's + muskets had been recharged.</p> + <p>"If we can do as well as we did before, those fellows will soon show + their backs!" Mark cried, cheerily, himself setting the example by + wounding the officer.</p> + <p>Now the bullets came thick and fast during a full minute, and then + the foremost of the assailants began to fall back, carrying the + officer with them, and an instant later the entire party was in full + and disorderly retreat.</p> + <p>Three children had actually beaten back twenty white men and nine + Indians, without having received a scratch!</p> + <p>Not until the faint-hearted men were at the water's edge, beyond + range of those in the stockade, was a halt made, and then it + appeared as if they were holding a council of war.</p> + <a id="pic_12"></a><img src="images/dti-12.jpg" alt="[Illustration: An instant later the entire party was in retreat.]"> + <br> + <p>The officer was laid in one of the boats, and the soldiers gathered + around him, the able-bodied gesticulating furiously, and the wounded + seated on the sand attending to their injuries. None had been killed + outright, but the majority of those who had been hit would not be + likely to take part in another attack, unless it was delayed for a + considerable time.</p> + <p>It seemed as if the white men gave but little attention to what the + Indians said during this council, for the savages were shouldered + aside with scant ceremony, and after a few moments all the Abenakis, + for none had been wounded, stalked gravely southward, where they + were soon lost to view amid the bushes.</p> + <p>"We're going to have trouble from those fellows, and it won't be + long coming," Mark said, as he leaped down from the platform, and + ran toward that portion of the stockade immediately in the rear of + the dwellings. "Keep a sharp watch over the Frenchmen, and let me + know what they are doing!"</p> + <p>Then he began putting up a platform at that point where he could + overlook the thicket, which last had been allowed to grow + dangerously near the buildings, and had hardly mounted for the + purpose of making a hasty survey, when a bullet imbedded itself in + one of the posts against which he leaned.</p> + <p>"What is the matter?" Susan cried.</p> + <p>"The Abenakis have sneaked around here, where they can shoot while + remaining under cover. Let mother come to load my muskets!"</p> + <p>The report of Mark's weapon followed the words, and from the thicket + two or three muskets were discharged, thus showing that the entire + force of Indians was lurking amid the underbrush.</p> + <p>Susan came running toward her cousin, carrying a weapon in each + hand, and the latter asked, sharply:</p> + <p>"Why have you left your post? The Abenakis won't kick up much of a + row until after dark."</p> + <p>"There is nothing to be done at the other side," Susan replied, as + she set about dragging two or three lobster-pots toward the + palisade. "The Frenchmen are paddling back to the schooner, not + leaving one behind, and Luke is watching to see when they leave the + vessel again."</p> + <p>Another bullet from the Thicket whistled uncomfortably near Mark's + head, and he understood that the most dangerous portion of the + attack was now to be met, for it was impossible to see a single foe. + The swaying of the branches or the tiny curls of smoke, were the + only tokens of an enemy, save when a weapon was discharged.</p> + <p>"Keep down under cover!" Mark cried, when Susan would have mounted + the collection of lobster-pots. "They are shooting close, and if you + should be disabled we would be in even worse trouble than we are + now."</p> + <p>"But you are showing them a target."</p> + <p id=tn11>"Some one must be here to hold them back." <a href="#t11">11</a></p> + <p>"Then I have the same right as you," and the courageous girl + clambered up on the shaky platform until it was possible for her to + look over the palisade.</p> + <p>It was a most dangerous position, and, fearing lest she should be + killed, Mark left his station to chop away the ends of the posts to + make loopholes.</p> + <p>"Now you can have a view of the woods without showing yourself," he + said, and would have gone back to his previous position, exposed + though it was, but that she stopped him by asking:</p> + <p>"Will you do the same at your end of the fence as you have here?"</p> + <p>"There isn't so much need for me to keep under cover."</p> + <p>"There is ten times more reason why you should be careful than for + me to skulk behind the posts. Unless you hew the timbers at your + station as you have these, I shall change places with you."</p> + <p>Mistress Pemberton added her commands to Susan's entreaties, with + the result that Mark was forced to protect himself so far as + possible, but while he chopped at the posts half a dozen bullets + struck close around the axe, showing that the Indians were on the + alert.</p> + <p>When half an hour had passed neither Mark nor Susan had seen one of + their enemies. Several times they fired at the places where the + branches were waving as if some person was walking beneath them; but + no cry of pain was heard to tell that the bullet had taken effect.</p> + <p>During this time Luke had reported more than once that the Frenchmen + yet remained on board their vessel, and when the sun was sinking + behind the hills Mark said to his cousin:</p> + <p>"We're wasting too much powder and lead, Sue. I don't believe one of + our bullets has gone home, and we have sent far too many at random. + The Frenchmen are not beaten yet, and we must have plenty of + ammunition when they come again."</p> + <p>"What, then, are we to do?"</p> + <p>"I will stay here, keeping guard lest the Abenakis attempt to scale + the fence. You and our mothers shall attend to the household duties, + holding yourselves in readiness to come whenever I shout."</p> + <p>"But there is nothing for me to do in the house."</p> + <p>"Then take advantage of the opportunity to get a little rest, for + it is certain that we shall have our hands full during all this + night. Get supper, if nothing more, and then bring me something to + drink."</p> + <p>"I'll do that first, and then look after myself," Susan said, as she + went toward the house, and a moment later Mark heard from her a cry + of distress.</p> + <p>"What's the matter?" he shouted, wildly, fearing, for the instant, + that some of the savages had gained entrance to the dwelling despite + his careful watch.</p> + <p>"The water! The water!" Susan cried, mournfully, and then came a hum + of voices raised high in excitement and fear, amid which the + sentinel could distinguish no words.</p> + <p>"Come here, Susan!" Mark shouted, peremptorily, and as the girl + appeared he demanded, "Now tell me what has gone wrong?"</p> + <p>"The children have spilled all the water we took into the house, and + there's not a drop to be had!"</p> + <p>"But they couldn't have carried the spring away," Mark replied, with + a laugh, able to make merry even amid the terrible surroundings, so + great was his relief at learning that nothing more serious had + caused the cry which startled him.</p> + <p>"The sheep have gathered there, until the entire place is a mass of + filthy mud."</p> + <p>"Well, well, don't let that distress you so sorely. We'll soon be + able to clear it out, for I reckon these beggarly Abenakis won't + keep me busy more than twelve hours."</p> + <p>"But if the Frenchmen should come in the meantime?"</p> + <p>"We'll take our chances of that, and get along without water a + little while."</p> + <a href="#toc">Return to Contents</a> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <div class=center id=V><h3>CHAPTER V.<br>FIRE</h3></div> + <br> + <p>Mark was disposed to make light of that which distressed Susan, and + thus did he make his first mistake in the defence.</p> + <p>To his mind there was nothing very serious in the loss of the water + which had been carried into the dwelling, because the spring was + within the stockade, and however much mischief the sheep had done, + it would be the work of but few moments to put everything in proper + order once more.</p> + <p>The chief thought in his mind was regarding the possible trouble + which the Abenakis might make while hidden in the thicket back of + the palisade, and, after this, the fear that the ablest of his + assistants might become disabled because of her wound, which had not + received the attention such an injury required.</p> + <p>Therefore it was he said to Susan speaking almost sharply to the end + that she might feel forced to obey without argument:</p> + <p>"The first thing for you to look after is that wound. Have your + mother dress it once more while you can be spared from the + palisade." Then, seeing that she hesitated, he added, "It is + necessary for the safety of all that you look after yourself, + because if you were disabled, we would be in most serious plight, + you being the best marksman among us."</p> + <p>Susan hesitated no longer; but went toward the house, even though + she did not believe it necessary to give very much attention to her + arm, which was not so badly injured but that she could use it with + comparative ease.</p> + <p>When she had disappeared within the dwelling, Mark, watching through + the loophole for a target, cried to his brother:</p> + <p>"How is everything over your way, Luke?"</p> + <p>"There has been no change. The Frenchmen are sticking close to their + vessel."</p> + <p>"I reckon it would be safe for you to come here a few minutes. I'll + send Mary to take your place."</p> + <p>The lad obeyed promptly, and, after cautioning him not to expose + himself to the aim of the enemy, although it was essential he keep + close lookout over the thicket, Mark went toward the spring.</p> + <p>The damage done by the sheep was greater than he had supposed. The + earth in the immediate vicinity had been ploughed up by the feet of + the animals until the spring was nearly choked, and Mark realized + that a full hour's work would be required to repair the mischief.</p> + <p>"We can't spend much time at it while the Abenakis are in the + woods," he said to himself. "Later in the might, perhaps, I shall + have a chance to do the job."</p> + <p>Then he went to where Mary was taking Luke's place as sentinel near + the gate, instructing her to raise an alarm immediately she saw any + movement on the part of the Frenchmen.</p> + <p>"Keep your eyes open wide," he said, "and, while watching the + schooner, give some attention to what may be going on close at hand. + I don't believe the Indians will come out of the thicket to show + themselves where no shelter can be found. But, at the same time, it + is possible. Remember that all our lives might pay the forfeit of + your carelessness."</p> + <p>"You can trust me as you do Susan, although I can't shoot so well; + but my eyes are as good as hers."</p> + <p>"True for you, sister mine, and between now and morning I'm counting + on your doing a full share of standing guard."</p> + <p>Then Mark ascended the platform for one look at the vessel, which + remained at her moorings with but few men showing on deck, after + which he went into the dwelling, where his mother was preparing + supper.</p> + <p>Susan's arm was being rebandaged, after having been bound up with + simples which had been gathered in the woods against just such an + emergency, and the smaller children were huddled in one corner like + frightened sheep.</p> + <p>"I have left Luke in my place," the lad said, in reply to his + mother's question. "The Abenakis are taking good care to keep out of + sight, and it is only a waste of ammunition to fire at a waving bush + or curl of smoke. I'll get something to eat, now that I'm here, and + then go on duty again."</p> + <p>Susan declared she would stand watch near the gate, in order that + Mary might take care of the children, and to that end ate supper + with Mark, after which the two went out to their weary, dangerous + vigil once more, with the disheartening knowledge that there was no + probability of receiving aid from any quarter.</p> + <a id="pic_13"></a><img src="images/dti-13.jpg" alt="[Illustration: Susan's arm was being rebandaged.]"> + <br> + <p>"We won't talk about it, Sue," Mark said, when his cousin bewailed + the fact that even though a fishing-vessel should pass near at hand, + her crew would not come ashore when it was seen that the <i>Future + Hopes</i> had left her anchorage. "We can't afford to look on the dark + side of affairs, lest we grow faint-hearted, for you know that, once + our courage is gone, we are the same as beaten."</p> + <p>Susan did not reply, as she might have done with truth, that they + were then very nearly in that deplorable condition; but shut her + teeth tightly as if to prevent the escape of a single word, while + she walked rapidly toward the gate to take her station as sentinel.</p> + <p>Mary begged to stand guard an hour or two longer; but Susan insisted + that she was needed in the house, and reluctantly the girl descended + from the platform.</p> + <p>Then Mark relieved Luke from duty, instructing him to first get his + supper, and then, if the Indians remained inactive, to set about + cleaning out the spring.</p> + <p>By this time the night had fully come, and Mark noted with + apprehension that clouds were gathering in the sky. While the moon + shone brightly it was as easy to guard against surprise as at + noonday; but once that light was obscured, the enemy might creep up + at a dozen places on the palisade without being detected.</p> + <p>"Two hours of blackness, and we are done for," Mark said to himself, + with a sigh, and then, remembering what he had told Susan, he added, + "We've got to take whatever comes, and the only manly way is to make + the best of it. In case it is very dark to-night, Mary and Ellen + must both stand watch with the rest of us."</p> + <p>The report of a musket interrupted his train of gloomy thoughts, and + involuntarily he ducked his head when a bullet came singing over the + fence so near that he felt the "wind" of it.</p> + <p>"You can't tempt me to shoot till I see something to fire at," he + said, grimly, watching through the loophole at the underbrush which + was merged by the shadows into one single mass of gloom, amid which + not even a movement among the branches could be distinguished.</p> + <p>Two more shots, which caused him to wonder why the Abenakis were + growing so active, and then he caught a glimpse of a faint spark in + the thicket, which at first sight appeared to him like the glow from + an Indian's pipe.</p> + <p>He had raised his musket, intending to fire at the bright spot, when + it suddenly increased in size, and, while he stood speculating as to + what it could be, a long tongue of flame leaped upward from branch + to branch.</p> + <p>No need for speculation now, nor was it well that he stand very much + longer on guard, for the terrible truth was all to plain.</p> + <p>The Abenakis had fired the woods, counting on burning the palisade, + and thus giving them free entrance for the bloody business upon + which they had come.</p> + <p>His first thought was to run for water, and then, even before he + could make a movement toward the spring, came the realization that + it was impossible to effect anything by such a course.</p> + <p>He would not be able to throw water upon the fire in the thicket, + even though he exposed himself to full view over the top of the + palisade, and this was probably exactly what the Indians hoped he + might do.</p> + <p>"It begins to look as if we had about come to an end of the defence, + and that nothing remains but to sell our lives as dearly as + possible," he said, gloomily, to himself. "Everything around here is + as dry as it well can be, and once the fire gains headway, even the + houses must go."</p> + <p>Mark descended doggedly from the platform, and as he did so Susan + cried, from her post of duty near the gate:</p> + <p>"What is on fire?"</p> + <p>"The Abenakis have started a blaze in the woods."</p> + <p>"Will the fence burn, think you?"</p> + <p>"Ay, when the fire is well under way."</p> + <p>"Can't we do anything toward putting out the blaze?"</p> + <p>"Nothing, unless we want the Indians to shoot us down before we can + fire a shot."</p> + <p>"Then what is to be done?" and in her distress Susan leaped down + from the platform to approach her cousin.</p> + <p>"Better stay where you are!" the lad cried, warningly. "I don't + suppose it will make any great difference to us, and yet we should + know if the Frenchmen come ashore after seeing the fire."</p> + <p>The girl returned immediately to her station, and even though he was + at a considerable distance from her, Mark could hear the choking sob + which escaped her lips.</p> + <p>"Keep up a stout heart, Sue; we can make a last stand inside the + house."</p> + <p>"Ay, Mark; but it will be the last!"</p> + <p>The lad made no reply; he stood at some distance from the palisade + as if trying to decide upon a course of action, and while he thus + remained irresolute his mother came from the house.</p> + <p>There was no need that she ask for information; the blaze was so + bright by this time that it must have been seen by those on the + vessel, and Mistress Pemberton inquired in a low tone, but with no + tremor in her voice:</p> + <p>"Are the logs dry?"</p> + <p>"Ay, mother; but it will be some time before the flames can eat in + very deeply. We've got fifteen or twenty minutes yet."</p> + <p>"What is to be done?"</p> + <p>"We'll take refuge in the house, and shoot down as many as possible + before the fire drives us out."</p> + <p>"If there is nothing more before us, why not come inside now? The + Indians can climb up on the posts on either side and shoot you down + while you stand here in the light."</p> + <p>"The Frenchmen are coming ashore!" Susan cried. "One boat-load has + pushed off already!"</p> + <p>"We are going into the house," Mark said, hesitatingly, as if, even + now, when prudence demanded that they should seek shelter as soon as + possible, he was questioning whether he might effect something by + remaining in the open.</p> + <p>"But if we don't stand guard the Indians will soon be over the + fence," the girl cried, nervously.</p> + <p>"Ay, and if you stand there in the glow of the fire they can creep + up under cover of the shadows to one side or the other, and shoot + you down. We've done all we can here, Sue, and the remainder of our + fight must be made from the house."</p> + <p>The report of a musket from the southern side of the stockade, and + the humming of a bullet close beside Susan's head, gave emphasis to + the lad's words, causing the sentinel to obey without further parley.</p> + <p>Once inside the dwelling, with the door strongly barred, the older + members of the little party strove to appear unconcerned, each + hoping to cheer the other, and at no time since the island was + besieged did they display more courage than now, when there seemed + no ray of hope remaining.</p> + <p>Through the crevices of the logs and the window-shutters could be + seen the glow of the flames, which were increasing each instant, + fanned as they were by short, furious gusts of wind which came from + the gathering clouds.</p> + <p>"We must get under the roof, where I made the loopholes," Mark said + to Susan and Luke. "There's no question but that the Indians will + make a try at coming over the stockade before the fire has destroyed + it, else they have changed their natures completely, and we won't + give them full swing, even though we are cooped up here like rats in + a trap."</p> + <p>"The boys want water," Ellen, who had been attending to the younger + children, said, at this moment, and the elders of the party looked + at each other in dismay.</p> + <p>The new danger which confronted them had driven, for the time being, + everything else from their minds; but now all realized that, even + though they might not be permitted to remain long in that frail + refuge, they would suffer severely from thirst before the end came.</p> + <p>"Get into the loft, one on each side, and shoot with good aim if you + see a painted face over the fence!" Mark cried, as he took up one of + the buckets and went swiftly toward the door.</p> + <p>"You must not go out!" his mother said, as she barred the way. "It + is certain by this time that the Abenakis are where they can have a + view of the enclosure, and you will be shot down. Better that the + children should suffer from thirst."</p> + <p>"We will all soon be needing something to drink, for it's bound to + be hot inside here when the palisade catches fire. One bucketful of + water will save us a good deal of suffering, and I'm bound to take + the chances."</p> + <p>Then, before his mother could prevent him, Mark opened the door, + running at full speed to the spring, which was not more than twenty + feet distant.</p> + <p>That the Abenakis were on the alert could be told when half a dozen + shots were fired in rapid succession; but, fortunately for the + defenders of the island, not a bullet took effect, owing to Mark's + rapid movements.</p> + <p>To those who were watching him in agonizing suspense from the house, + it seemed as if the lad no more than wheeled about when he gained + the spring, and then came toward the building in a zigzag course, + well calculated to confuse the most skilful marksman.</p> + <a id="pic_14"></a><img src="images/dti-14.jpg" alt="[Illustration: He reëntered the house with a bucket two-thirds full of muddy water.]"> + <br> + <p id=tn12>He reëntered the house with a bucket two-thirds full of muddy water, + and, while barring the door, once more said, in a tone of triumph: <a href="#t12">12</a></p> + <p>"I reckoned it might be done if a fellow used his legs well. That + stuff doesn't look fit to drink; but after the mud has settled a bit + it will be better than nothing. I am to blame for not cleaning the + spring out when I first knew that the children had wasted the + supply."</p> + <p>"You have nothing with which to reproach yourself, Mark," his aunt + said as she laid her hand affectionately on his shoulder. "You have + taken the place of both your father and uncle, and there is not a + man grown who could have done more, or better, work."</p> + <p>The lad's face flushed with pleasure at this praise, but he affected + to give no heed to the words as he clambered into the loft, musket + in hand, calling out when he was on the timbers above:</p> + <p>"Give us the ammunition up here, and we'll load our own guns until + the enemy comes too fast."</p> + <p>Mistress Pemberton handed him only a portion of the powder and + bullets, after which she stood on the top of a table ready to take + the empty weapons when the sharpshooters required her services.</p> + <p>Mark was the first to discharge his musket, and a cry of pain + followed the report, telling that the ammunition had not been wasted.</p> + <p>"What did you see?" his mother asked, anxiously.</p> + <p>"An Indian's head over the top of the fence near the gate. There's + one villain the less to trouble us!"</p> + <p>At this moment Susan and Luke both fired, the reports coming so near + together as to sound like one, and the girl cried, triumphantly:</p> + <p>"I've hit another! What did you do, Luke?"</p> + <p>"I don't know; he went backward at the flash, like a loon; but it + seems as if I must have struck him, for I had a fair aim."</p> + <p>Mistress Pemberton now had work to perform, for those in the loft + soon learned that it would be impossible to recharge the weapons and + at the same time keep close watch on what might be happening outside.</p> + <p>Seven shots had been fired from the dwelling, three of which were + known to have found their targets, when a heavy pounding at the gate + told of additional danger.</p> + <p>"What is it?" Mistress Harding cried, and Mark replied, quietly, as + if it was of no especial consequence:</p> + <p>"The Frenchmen have come, and are battering down the gate."</p> + <p>"How long will it take them to do it?" Susan asked, her voice + quivering despite all efforts to render it steady.</p> + <p>"It will be a good half-hour's job, with what timber they can pick + up near at hand. If they should cut down a stout tree, the work + might be done in half that time. Keep your eyes on the top of the + fence, for if one fellow gets inside he might succeed in pulling out + the bars before we could stop him."</p> + <p>Twice more the children fired, and then it was as if the Abenakis + had tired of a game at which they were rapidly being worsted without + an opportunity to inflict any injury.</p> + <p>"They've made up their minds to wait till the gate is down," Mark + said, grimly. "We must have all the muskets ready when the rush + comes, and shoot with good aim, for it will be our last fair chance."</p> + <p>All this while the flames had been increasing in volume, and the + heat inside the dwelling, filled with the smoke of burning powder as + it was, seemed stifling.</p> + <p>The younger children had drank of the muddy water eagerly, giving no + heed to its disagreeable appearance, and the older members of the + little company were already suffering with thirst; but never one of + them ventured to claim a portion of the scanty supply.</p> + <p>"The fence is on fire," Mark said as he left his station at the + front of the loft to survey the scene in the rear. "The wind is + getting up in great shape, and coming from the east, otherwise these + housed would be on fire by this time."</p> + <p>"There goes the upper part of the gate!" Luke cried. "Two or three + more fair blows, and the whole will be down!"</p> + <p>Mark came back to where he could overlook the scene of what he + believed would be the final struggle, and the three children + crouched, muskets in hand, ready to empty the six weapons before the + enemy could approach the house sufficiently near to find shelter + under its walls.</p> + <p>The two women were standing on a table, where they could reach the + weapons when they were empty. In one corner of the room, seated on a + bed which was laid on the floor behind the barricade of the door, + were the other children, some crying for water, and others weeping + with fear.</p> + <p>The powder smoke hung heavily in the small apartment, which was + illumined by the glow of the flames, now not more than thirty feet + distant, and the heat was almost overpowering.</p> + <p>The bucket in which Mark had brought the muddy water from the + spring, was empty, and the throats of the three children in the loft + were literally parched with a thirst that could not be allayed.</p> + <p>They were beset by danger on every hand, and the supreme moment + seemed very near, for once the gate was demolished, however + desperately they might fight, the end was come.</p> + <p>"We are not to leave here alive," Susan whispered softly in Mark's + ear, and he replied, pressing her hand:</p> + <p>"That part of it sha'n't be forgotten, Sue dear."</p> + <p>A cry from Luke; the crashing and splintering of wood; a shock which + could be felt by the refugees as the heavy timbers fell inward, and + the passage was open to the foe.</p> + <p>"Take good aim!" Mark shouted. "Shoot at the foremost, and work + quickly!"</p> + <p>While one might have counted ten the enemy hung back as if fearing + that a party of women and children might have planned an ambush, and + then with a yell of triumph, the opening in the palisade was filled + with armed men.</p> + <p>The defenders in the loft fired at almost the same instant; then, + delaying only sufficiently long to fling back the empty weapons and + take up those that were loaded, three more reports rang out.</p> + <p>The Frenchmen halted irresolutely for an instant, as four of their + number fell to the ground, and had the children been able to fire + one more volley immediately, it is quite certain the entire party + would have beaten a retreat even at the moment of victory.</p> + <p id=tn13>As the men, recovering courage, dashed forward, a heavy peal of + thunder seemed to shake the very earth, and on the moment rain fell + in torrents, coming as suddenly and in such volume as if having been + poured from some immense reservoir. <a href="#t13">13</a></p> + <p>The enemy recoiled as if confronted by an overwhelming force, and as + they wavered the children in the loft discharged three muskets, each + bullet seemingly taking effect.</p> + <p>Then, suddenly, it was as if a black mantel had been dropped over + the terrible scene. A certain portion of the enormous downpour of + water was converted into clouds of steam by the flames, which were + literally beaten down, and those who had struggled so bravely to + defend the island could distinguish nothing.</p> + <a id="pic_15"></a><img src="images/dti-15.jpg" alt="[Illustration: Again the crash of thunder drowned all sounds.]"> + <br> + <p>"What is the matter?" Ellen cried in alarm at thus being suddenly + plunged into profound darkness, and the younger children screamed + with terror.</p> + <p>A deafening peal of thunder seemingly came in answer to the question + followed a second later by a vivid, blinding flash of lightning + which illumined the interior of the loft through the few crevices + between the logs, until the defenders could see each other's faces + gleaming ghastly pale.</p> + <p>The water trickling through the roof restored them to their senses + somewhat, and Mark said, speaking as if with an effort:</p> + <p>"The storm has been gathering since afternoon. Now, while we are + cooped up here in the darkness, the enemy can work his will!"</p> + <p>Again the crashing of thunder drowned all other sounds; once more + the jagged rifts of unearthly fire, breaking though the clouds, + illumined the scene, and Susan cried, as if unable to believe her + own statement:</p> + <p>"The men are running away! They are running away!"</p> + <p>Mark and Luke sprang to her side, waiting for another flash of + lightning, and when it came, preceded by crashing thunder which + caused the house of logs to tremble, the enclosure was deserted.</p> + <p>"It's true that some of them have gone; perhaps all," Mark + announced; "but the whole crew will come back when the storm is + over, and there will be nothing save our muskets to prevent them + from marching in at their pleasure."</p> + <p>"Let us give thanks for the mercies which have already been bestowed + upon us," Mistress Pemberton said, devoutly. "The fire is + extinguished, and we need no longer fear being burned to death."</p> + <p>"That might not be the worst that will befall us," Mark thought, + recalling to mind the fate of those settlers of Maine who had been + put to death by torture.</p> + <p>Because of the fury of the tempest, it seemed as if its force must + be quickly spent, and the besieged waited in painful suspense, + fearing that the downpour of water would speedily cease; but the + moments went by amid the flashing of lightning and crashing of + thunder, without any abatement of the tempest, save as the wind + lulled for a few seconds to come in yet more spiteful gusts.</p> + <p>When half an hour had passed, Mistress Pemberton insisted that the + three children should come down from the loft in order that they + might all be together during this respite from the cruel foe, and + when they were in the room below, freed from the fear of immediate + death, thanks were given to Him who "ruleth the tempest" for this + new lease of life, brief though it might prove to be.</p> + <a href="#toc">Return to Contents</a> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <div class=center id=VI><h3>CHAPTER VI.<br>THE WRECK</h3></div> + <br> + <p id=tn14>Hope once more sprang up in the hearts of those who had been so + sorely tried, when the storm continued with greal fury. The + electrical portion of the tempest appeared to have passed away, + leaving the raging wind and pelting rain to guard the settlers who + of a verity had descended into the very valley of the shadow of + death. <a href="#t14">14</a></p> + <p>When it was understood that that which was at first supposed to be a + summer gale had developed into a furious northeast storm, giving no + token of subsiding, Mark said as he rose to his feet:</p> + <p>"When the rain first came it seemed as if my throat was parched dry + with thirst, and now that water is to be had in abundance, all hands + of us appear to have forgotten that we wanted a drink."</p> + <p>"We might catch some of the water that is finding its way through + the roof," Mistress Pemberton said as if such a possibility had + never occurred to her before.</p> + <p>"We can do better than that, mother dear. I'll go to the spring for + a full bucket, and when it has been strained we shall have what will + be an improvement on rainwater."</p> + <p>"But possibly some of the enemy may be lurking outside," Mistress + Harding said, becoming timorous once more, now that the imminent + danger had passed.</p> + <p>"Whoever has been out in the storm all this while will be harmless, + aunt, for his musket would be filled with something other than + powder," Mark replied with a laugh, and then he unbarred the door, + surprised to find that it was only with difficulty he could make + headway against the furious blasts.</p> + <p>So powerful was the wind that it became necessary for Susan and Luke + to unite their strength in order to close the door while Mark was + absent, and when he returned with a brimming bucket of discolored + water, the three had no little difficulty in putting the bars into + place again.</p> + <p>"It is the fiercest storm I ever saw!" Mark exclaimed as he dashed + the rain-drops from his face. "We'll pray that the <i>Future Hopes</i> is + in a snug harbor, otherwise she will have to scud, for I don't + believe they could heave her to."</p> + <p>"Do you think there is any probability your father and uncle may be + out in this tempest?" Mistress Pemberton asked, more anxious now for + the safety of the absent ones then she previously had been + concerning herself.</p> + <p>"They are too good sailors, mother dear, to take many chances, and + we had fair warning of this storm. If we hadn't been in such sore + straits, there's no question but that we would have been prepared + for it. I noticed the clouds gathering, but at the time thought only + that it would be our misfortune, since we could not keep watch of + the Indians. Close-reefed, and with plenty of sea-room, the <i>Future + Hopes</i> will ride out this gale without doing more harm to herself + than the straining of a seam, perhaps."</p> + <p>"The Frenchmen could not have had time to get their vessel under + way," Mistress Pemberton said as if thinking aloud, and Mark sprang + to his feet in excitement.</p> + <p>"Of course they couldn't, and it is well for them if they didn't + succeed in getting on board, for the craft never had been built that + can ride at anchor to the eastward of the brook while the wind is so + heavy. It would have been impossible to get under way, for she'd be + on the rocks before her nose could be brought around into the wind!"</p> + <p>"Do you suppose they are yet on the island?"</p> + <p>"I think, unless all hands are good sailors, that they'd try to get + on board, and that could have been done because the sea wouldn't + grow heavy in an instant."</p> + <p>Further speculation as to the fate of their foes was checked very + suddenly by what sounded like the groaning of a human being in + deepest distress, coming from one corner of the room in which they + were seated.</p> + <p>Instinctively the inmates of the dwelling clutched each other, for + it was impossible to see anything in that profound darkness, and + during many seconds no one spoke.</p> + <p>Then the dismal sound could be heard once more, and Mark, forcing + himself to beat down the fear which assailed him, said, with an + effort:</p> + <p id=tn15>"Can you find one of the candles, mother? Some one here must be + dying. Where are the children?" <a href="#t15">15</a></p> + <p>"Johnny and Jimmie are with me," Ellen said, and Mary added:</p> + <p>"I'm here with Luke."</p> + <p>"No one could have got inside without our knowing it," Mistress + Pemberton said, as she groped around for the scanty store of + candles, which were reserved for use on especial occasions.</p> + <p>Mark did not reply until his mother succeeded, after many fruitless + efforts, in striking a spark from the steel and flint on the tinder, + and as the feeble flame of the candle flickered and flared in the + wind which made its way through the crevices, the lad began to tear + away the barricade of household goods which had been thrown up to + screen the window.</p> + <p>"It is useless to search there," Mistress Pemberton said, quickly, + as if a sudden thought had come to her. "One of those whom you + wounded is lying outside, and we hear his moans because he is close + beside the building."</p> + <p>Mark was at the door in an instant, forgetting that he was hastening + to the succor of one who, a short hour previous, was bent on killing + him, and Susan seized the lad by the arm, as she said in a tone of + caution:</p> + <p>"It may be some trick to get you outside. Be careful what you do; we + have heard that the Indians often make use of such means to get a + victim in their clutches."</p> + <p>"I'll warrant there is no Indian living who could stay out in this + storm an hour or more, and then be able to do very much mischief," + Mark replied as he unfastened the bar, waiting only long enough for + Luke and Susan to get hold of the door, lest it should be torn from + its hinges by the wind, before he darted out into the blackness.</p> + <p>A moment later it was possible to hear his voice, as if he spoke to + someone, and then all was still, save for the raging of the tempest, + until he cried from the outside:</p> + <p>"Open the door, youngsters. I've got a Frenchman here, who must be + very near death!"</p> + <p>Then, as Luke and Susan gave him admittance, he came staggering into + the room with an apparently lifeless body in his arms, while + Mistress Pemberton shielded the candle as best she might, lest the + wind extinguish the feeble flame.</p> + <p>Mark laid his burden on the bed, heeding not the fact that the water + was running from every angle of the stranger's garments.</p> + <p>Like Mark, the two women forgot that a bitter enemy was before them; + but with gentle care set about ministering to his wants, if, indeed + he would have any more in this world.</p> + <p>Now all the occupants of the dwelling were too much engrossed with + the work of saving the life which had so nearly been taken by one of + their number to be able to tell whether the storm was yet raging, or + if the morning had come.</p> + <p>In a very short time it was learned that the man lived, although how + he survived after being exposed to the fury of the tempest so long, + could not be understood. He had an ugly-looking wound in the thigh, + and another in the left breast; but Mistress Pemberton gave it as + her opinion that he was not mortally hurt.</p> + <p>"With good nursing, I doubt not but that he will live," she said, as + she dressed the wounds to the best of her ability. "But if he does, + what shall we do with him?"</p> + <p>"There is no need to answer that question now, mother dear," Mark + said, gently. "We'll try to pull him through, even if we have + already done our best to kill him, and then he'll know what it is to + have coals of fire heaped on his head; that is," he added, after a + brief pause, "if his comrades allow us to live long enough to do the + job."</p> + <p>A fire was built, tea of herbs made and administered to the + sufferer, and before morning came it was possible for him to speak.</p> + <p>He was sufficiently acquainted with the English language to make + them understand him, and his first words were expressive of surprise.</p> + <p>"Save when you attack us without cause, we have no desire for your + death," Mistress Pemberton replied. "Now you are no longer a + soldier, striving to do us grievous injury, but a suffering fellow + creature, and so long as it is in our power we will do whatsoever we + may toward giving you aid."</p> + <p>The wounded man turned his face away, as if ashamed to look the good + woman in the face, and after a time Mark questioned him as to how + the chanced to be so near the house.</p> + <p>From his story, told little by little because of the difficulty + experienced in talking, the facts were soon known.</p> + <p>He had been among the first to burst through the gate, and was not + wounded until when the last shot was fired. Then instinct prompted + him to gain a shelter under the wall of the building, where it would + not be possible for those on the inside to see him, immediately + after which he lost consciousness. During a long while he remained + as if dead, and it is probable that the deluge of rain served to + revive him after a time; but he was ignorant of having made any + outcry. He remembered of realizing that he was alone, exposed to + the storm, and the next knowledge was that the women were striving + to nurse him back to life.</p> + <a id="pic_16"></a><img src="images/dti-16.jpg" alt="[Illustration: The next knowledge was that the women were trying to nurse him back to life.]"> + <br> + <p>It was morning before the inmates of the dwelling gave much heed to + anything save the wounded soldier, and then Mark, after cautioning + the remainder of the family to stay inside the dwelling unless they + heard his cry for help, ventured out into the tempest, which + continued with but little decrease of violence.</p> + <p>The sun had not yet risen, and it the gray light of early dawn it + was not possible to distinguish objects at any great distance. He + had, in the immediate vicinity of the stockade, however, good proof + of the violence with which the storm raged.</p> + <p>A portion of the palisade itself had been overthrown, leaving an + opening through which the entire force of the enemy might have + marched shoulder to shoulder. Trees were uprooted; the small boat, + which had been drawn beyond reach of the tide, was now within ten + feet of the battered gate, having been carried there by the wind.</p> + <p>That the buildings within the stockade remained un-injured was due, + doubtless, to the thicket in the rear which served to shield them + from the full fury of the elements.</p> + <p>Turn where he might, the same scene of devastation met his gaze, and + he understood that if any of the Frenchmen remained on the island + they would be powerless to depart, for their vessel could not have + outlived the night.</p> + <p>The wind was yet so violent that only with difficulty could he make + his way from one point to another, and the rain beat upon his face + until it became necessary to shield his eyes in order to see + anything twenty paces distant; but he struggled against the + elements, making his way along the shore toward the place where the + Frenchmen's schooner had been moored.</p> + <p>The vessel no longer remained at her anchorage, nor did he expect to + see her there; but he was not quite prepared for that which met his + gaze when he was where a view of the most northerly point of the + harbor island could be had.</p> + <p>Between where he stood and the opposite shore was the hull of the + schooner, keel uppermost, tossing on the short waves, now completely + submerged, and again rising high in the air until the greater + portion of the planking could be seen. Clinging to this restless + wreck were six or eight human beings, and on the beach at his feet + lay the bodies of two men who had been beaten down to death during + the conflict of the elements.</p> + <p>After watching for several moments the plunging, rolling remnant of + what had been a seagoing vessel, fitted to withstand almost any + buffeting of wave or wind, Mark became convinced that the wreck was + moored in some fashion, and then it was possible to guess very + nearly how the disaster had occurred.</p> + <p>It seemed probable that when the first of the Frenchmen gained the + schooner's deck, after the fury of the tempest had forced them to + retreat from the stockade, the wild tossing of the craft as the + waves were beginning to rise induced them to let go every anchor on + board, under the belief that she could be held at moorings until the + storm had subsided sufficiently to admit of her clawing away from + the shore.</p> + <a id="pic_17"></a><img src="images/dti-17.jpg" alt="[Illustration: He gazed at the struggling wretches on the bottom of the wreck.]"> + <br> + <p>When the tempest was at its height, and after the attacking party + had succeeded in getting on board, the little craft must have been + literally blown down, until the water, rushing into the open + hatches, had caused her to completely upset.</p> + <p>The wounded, and all others who were in the cabin, must have been + drowned offhand, and that some of those who tried to save themselves + by clinging to the hulk had suffered a like fate could be told by + the lifeless bodies at Mark's feet.</p> + <p>Aid had come to the defenders of the island on the wings of the + tempest; and at the very time when it seemed as if all hope of + succor was vain, the enemy had been overcome by "Him who holdeth the + waters in the hollow of His hand."</p> + <p>As he gazed at the struggling wretches on the bottom of the wreck, + some of whom waved their hands feebly, as if nearly exhausted and + imploring him to help them, Mark forgot that but a few hours + previous these same men had been thirsting for his blood, and + thought only that they were in sore need of his assistance.</p> + <p>He ran with all speed to the stockade, shouting as he approached, + and when the women and children hastened outside, believing him to + be in distress, he hurriedly told of what he had seen.</p> + <p>"Of all those who made the attack, I am satisfied that only the men + on the hulk remain alive. It is for us to help them if we can. There + should be enough of us here to drag our boat to the water, and Luke + and I will see what can be done in the way of life-saving."</p> + <p>Sorely beset though they had been, no one thought at that moment of + the suffering which had been endured because of these men who were + now so near death; but all, even the youngest children, laid hold of + the boat to launch her.</p> + <p>It was no slight task to drag the craft, small though she was, over + the sand to the water's edge; but the task was finally accomplished, + and then many moments were spent trying to find the oars, which had + been blown out of the boat during such time as the tempest forced + her upon the shore.</p> + <p>A full half-hour must have elapsed from the moment Mark discovered + the wreck until he and his brother were ready to set off on their + mission of mercy, and then it was an open question as to whether + they would succeed in the battle against the boisterous waves.</p> + <p>The members of both families stood near the water's edge, regardless + of the furious storm which was raging, as they watched with anxious + eyes the efforts of the lads. They had set out to save lives; but + very many times did it seem as if their own must of a certainty be + sacrificed.</p> + <p>Fortunately they were partially sheltered from the wind by the + harbor island, otherwise the task could never have been + accomplished, and not until both the lads were well-nigh exhausted + did they arrive at the plunging hulk.</p> + <p id=tn16>Now it was that the most dangerous portion of the work must be + performed. Only at imminent risk of swamping the small boat could + she be taken sufficiently near the wreck to permit of a rescue, and + then it was necessary to handle her with the utmost skill, otherwise + she would have been stove to kindling against the side of the hulk. <a href="#t16">16</a></p> + <p>When the boat came close at hand, all the Frenchmen gathered at one + point, as if counting on leaping aboard at the same moment, and + Mark shouted, peremptorily:</p> + <p>"You'll swamp us if more than one comes at a time. Lay back there + you fellows who are the strongest, and help the weakest first!"</p> + <p>Then they quarreled among themselves, each insisting that he was in + the greatest need of help, and Mark, finally becoming impatient, + cried, sternly:</p> + <p>"If you can't come aboard like decent people, we'll leave the whole + boiling of you to get along as may be possible."</p> + <p>"There is not one of us who can cling to this wreck half an hour + longer," a man cried, piteously. "Already five have been washed away + and drowned."</p> + <p>"Two of you take hold and send aboard that fellow who is lying + across the keel. He seems to be in the worst shape. Stand back!" + the lad added, as four men made ready to seize the small boat at + the first opportunity. "If you come in other order than I give the + word, I'll leave all hands."</p> + <p>By dint of scolding, pulling the boat forward or back as the waves + threatened, and otherwise handling his small craft in a sailorly + fashion, Mark succeeded in getting four of the men aboard, leaving + three to be rescued later.</p> + <p>The boat would carry no more of a load than she then had, while the + storm was so furious, and the lads pulled shoreward, aided greatly, + when going in this direction, by the wind.</p> + <p>The members of both families gathered on the beach near about where + a landing would be made, and when the shipwrecked men had been set + ashore they were helped toward the stockade by the women and + children, for the Frenchmen were so nearly exhausted that it was + impossible to walk unaided.</p> + <p>Then Mark and Luke started on the second journey, battling quite as + desperately as before, and the day was fully half-spent when they + brought the last of the survivors ashore.</p> + <p>It was not until the seven Frenchmen were being cared for in the + apartment of the Pemberton house where the wounded soldier lay, that + the lad began to realize the possible danger. These eight men, after + having recovered, might easily take possession of the stockade, and + Mark was inclined to believe that people who were willing to make + war on women and children, could not be trusted to play a manly part + even toward those who had saved them from death.</p> + <p>"What shall we do with them all?" Susan asked, as she came out of + the house, which had much the appearance of a hospital, to where + Mark stood studying the matter seriously.</p> + <p>"It has just come into my mind that we might herd them in your + father's house. The greater portion of the things have been taken + from there, and we can arrange it to bar the doors and shutters on + the outside."</p> + <p>"Are you counting on holding them as prisoners?" Susan asked, in + surprise.</p> + <p>"That is the only way we may be certain of a crew like that. After + all that has happened, I wouldn't believe in any promises that might + be made, and they shall be guarded like so many wildcats."</p> + <p>"Every one of whom appears to be grateful."</p> + <p>"Ay, I suppose they are now, before having recovered; but it may be + a different matter, once they're in good shape."</p> + <p>"Do you believe there can be any on the harbor island?"</p> + <p>"I'm satisfied there are no others alive out of all the crew of + French and Indians. Luke and I counted on burying the bodies which + have been washed ashore, and while we are at that work you had + better gather up all the muskets and ammunition, hiding the lot in + the stable until we have the men secured."</p> + <p>Then, calling his brother, Mark set off toward the beach to perform + the last rites over those who had lost their lives while trying to + commit murder most foul, and, that having been done, the two lads + began transforming the Harding house into a prison, which last was + done by fastening all the shutters and one of the doors on the + outside. The other door was to be barred in such a manner that it + could be readily opened by those who were charged with the care of + the Frenchmen.</p> + <p>These tasks were not completed until nightfall, and then Mark told + the rescued party exactly what it was his purpose to do, explaining + that he was not ready to believe in any protestations they might + make.</p> + <p>"You must be held prisoners until our fathers return, and it is to + be remembered that if we find one of you attempting to leave the + building, which will be given over to your use, we shall shoot him + down without the slightest feeling of pity or remorse."</p> + <p>The men swore most solemnly that they would obey every command which + might be given by those who had saved them from death, and Mark, + armed with a loaded musket, lost no time in escorting them to the + Harding house.</p> + <p>It was his intention to have them closely guarded during every hour + of the day and night, and to such end Luke was stationed at the + front of the building, where, through a crevice which had been made + between the logs by Mark, he could keep his charges in view.</p> + <p>Mistress Pemberton would not consent to having the wounded man + removed with the others. He was given a bed in one corner of the + room, after the furniture piled up as a barricade had been put in + place, and Mary and Ellen were instructed to watch him, not with the + idea that he might try to escape, but because his condition was + such, owing to the wounds and subsequent exposure, that the most + careful nursing and attention was needed.</p> + <p>The storm subsided at sunset; the clouds disappeared, and the first + night after the besieged were turned jailers was as calm and + peaceful as if the harmony of nature had never been disturbed by the + clash of arms.</p> + <p>Luke remained on duty until about ten o'clock in the evening, when + Susan took his place, and shortly after midnight Mark took his turn + at guarding the prisoners.</p> + <p>The Frenchmen had shown no signs of a disposition to do other than + as they were commanded; but Mark would not put faith in them, and + kept his watch as if knowing they had already formed a plan for + capturing those who succored them.</p> + <p>The lad paced to and fro in front of the dwelling, looking in upon + the men every five minutes, until a new day had come, and then as he + gazed across the waters watching for the sun to rise, he saw the + dingy canvas of the <i>Future Hopes</i>, glistening like silver in the + early light.</p> + <p>The fresh breeze was bearing the little vessel swiftly on, and + before any inmate of the Pemberton house was astir, she swung to her + anchor close inside the harbor, while the two men listened to the + story which Mark had to tell.</p> + <p>The fishermen had not been able to gain a shelter when the storm + burst upon them, therefore the <i>Future Hopes</i> scudded before the + wind during the four and twenty hours, which explained why she had + arrived so much sooner than had been expected.</p> + <p>It would be a labor of love to follow the fortunes of these two + families who, in 1758, defended the Island of Mount Desert so + bravely against the combined attacks of French and Indians; but + historians make no further mention of them, after setting forth in + the fewest possible words their deeds, therefore this tale must + perforce come to an end.</p> + <p>We do know, however, from the records of Pemaquid, that Masters + Pemberton and Harding carried to the fort eight Frenchmen as + prisoners, and that the authorities of Massachusetts took them in + charge several weeks later.</p> + <p>It is also known that in 1769 one Mark Pemberton, with his wife + Susan, settled on Penobscot Bay near where the town of Camden now + stands, and it is reasonable to infer that this man was the same + who, aided by Susan Harding, so bravely defended the island.</p> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <div class=center><br>THE END.</div> + <br> + <br> + <br> + <p><b>[Transcriber's Notes:]</b> + <br> + <br> + Here are all the misspelled words, odd usages and other things of + note that I have found. + <br> + The word "defence", as it is spelled throughout, is time period + spelling.<br> + <a id="t1" href="#tn1">1</a> This paragraph is accurate to the book. It + could read like this: "...otherwise the defences would not be being + strengthened when the boys should have been making ready...".<br> + <a id="t2" href="#tn2">2</a> The words "any one" appear to be time period + usage.<br> + <a id="t3" href="#tn3">3</a> The original does use the word "then" though it should probably be "when": + "...relieved from guard duty, and <i>when</i> the gate had been closed..."<br> + <a id="t4" href="#tn4">4</a> The original does use the word "and": "...the + gate was barred on the inside, and Mary Pemberton standing close + beside it..."<br> + <a id="t5" href="#tn5">5</a> The original does use the word "prosecute". I + suspect it is just time period usage. "...in position to prosecute + their murderous work."<br> + <a id="t6" href="#tn6">6</a> This paragraph is accurate to the book: + "...there's no show of our being able to do anything here..."<br> + <a id="t7" href="#tn7">7</a> The second "e" in the word "reechoed" is a small + letter "e" with diaeresis.<br> + <a id="t8" href="#tn8">8</a> The words "any one" appear to be time period usage.<br> + <a id="t9" href="#tn9">9</a> The word "of" appears to be time period usage: + "...uncle heard from those aboard of the last vessel...".<br> + <a id="t10" href="#tn10">10</a> The word "resentiments" appears to be a misprint of + "resentments". "...gave vent to their resentiments and rage..."<br> + <a id="t11" href="#tn11">11</a> The words "some one" appear to be time period + usage.<br> + <a id="t12" href="#tn12">12</a> The second "e" in the word "reentered" is a + small letter "e" with diaeresis. It is also used in the title of the + 13th illustration.<br> + <a id="t13" href="#tn13">13</a> This paragraph is accurate to the book: + "...shake the very earth, and on the moment rain fell in torrents..."<br> + <a id="t14" href="#tn14">14</a> The word "greal" appears to be a misprint for "great". + "...the storm continued with greal fury."<br> + <a id="t15" href="#tn15">15</a> The words "some one" appear to be time period usage.<br> + <a id="t16" href="#tn16">16</a> The word "of" appears to be time period + usage: "...to permit of a rescue..."<b><br> + [End of Transcriber's Notes]</b></p> + <br> + <br> + </div> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Defending the Island, by James Otis + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DEFENDING THE ISLAND *** + +***** This file should be named 34558-h.htm or 34558-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/4/5/5/34558/ + +Produced by Zechariah Stover (ZechariahStover.com) + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + + </body> +</html> + diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-1.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-1.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4e1666e --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-1.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-10.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-10.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5bdb37d --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-10.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-11.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-11.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d95e6d --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-11.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-12.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-12.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..31755b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-12.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-13.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-13.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..48388e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-13.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-14.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-14.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b6b651f --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-14.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-15.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-15.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..70030ee --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-15.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-16.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-16.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c16e94b --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-16.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-17.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-17.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4a8289 --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-17.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-2.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-2.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..41026e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-2.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-3.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-3.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f2b4e59 --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-3.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-4.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-4.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..bed75a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-4.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-5.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-5.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..359f967 --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-5.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-6.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-6.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2890eec --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-6.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-7.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-7.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab405b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-7.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-8.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-8.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..aebdb0e --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-8.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-9.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-9.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed566ec --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-9.jpg diff --git a/34558-h/images/dti-cover.jpg b/34558-h/images/dti-cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b5462d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/34558-h/images/dti-cover.jpg diff --git a/34558.txt b/34558.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..91fadea --- /dev/null +++ b/34558.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3557 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Defending the Island, by James Otis + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Defending the Island + A story of Bar Harbor in 1758 + +Author: James Otis + +Release Date: December 4, 2010 [EBook #34558] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DEFENDING THE ISLAND *** + + + + +Produced by Zechariah Stover (ZechariahStover.com) + + + + + + Defending the Island. + + [Frontispiece: Friend or enemy? (see Chapter III.)] + + + + DEFENDING THE ISLAND + A STORY OF BAR HARBOR IN 1758 + BY + JAMES OTIS + + + Boston + DANA ESTES & COMPANY + PUBLISHERS + + + + + + _Copyright, 1904_ + BY DANA ESTES & COMPANY + _All rights reserved_ + + + CONTENTS + I. THE ISLAND + II. THE FIRST ASSAULT + III. A DAY OF SUSPENSE + IV. AN ATTACK + V. FIRE + VI. THE WRECK + + + + + LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS + + Friend or enemy? (See Chapter III.) _Frontispiece_ + "'Indians skulking on the harbor island!'" + "The stout-hearted girl set about the task" + "Susan stood guard at the gateway" + "The children had improvised platforms" + "Mark saw a canoe put off from the Harbor Island" + "'You shall not have the smallest chicken inside this stockade!'" + "'Look! Look! A vessel!'" + "He returned with a heavy log" + "'Do you refuse to surrender?'" + "An instant later the entire party was in retreat" + "Susan's arm was being rebandaged" + "He reentered the house with a bucket two-thirds full of muddy water" + "Again the crash of thunder drowned all sounds" + "The next knowledge was that the women were trying to nurse him + back to life" + "He gazed at the struggling wretches on the bottom of the wreck" + + + + +Defending the island. + + + + +CHAPTER I + +THE ISLAND + + +In the year of grace 1758 there were two families living on that +island which we of to-day call Mount Desert; but Champlain named +Mons Deserts, because its thirteen high, rugged mountains could be +seen from the seaward a distance of twenty leagues, making it the +first landmark of the coast for seamen. + +It is said, by those gentlemen who write down historical facts for +us young people to study, that the "savages were much attached to +the island; for in the mountains they hunted bears, wildcats, +raccoons, foxes, and fowls; in the marshes and natural meadows, +beaver, otter and musquash; and in the waters they took fin and +shellfish." + +Now in the proper kind of a story there should be nothing which +savors of school-book study, and yet, before telling how the +children of these two families defended the island in 1758, it seems +much as if the reader would have a better idea of all that was done, +if he or she knew just a few facts concerning those who lived on +Mount Desert before Stephen Pemberton and Silas Harding took there +their wives and children to build for themselves homes. + +It is said, by those who busy themselves with finding out about such +things, that in the year 1605 Champlain stopped at the island and +named it; but not until four years later did any white people visit +the place. Then two Jesuit missionaries, who had been living at Port +Royal, under the protection of Monsieur Biencourt, went to Mount +Desert with the hope of converting the Indians to Christianity. + +How long these good men lived there, no one seems to know; but it is +certain that they went back to Port Royal quite soon, because, in +the year 1613, a Frenchman, by the name of La Suassaye, the agent of +Madame de Guercheville, a very rich and religious lady, visited Port +Royal, and persuaded the missionaries to return to Mount Desert, in +company with several French colonists. + +An Englishman by the name of Argall, who had come across the ocean +to drive away the French people from North America, in order to take +possession of the country in the name of his king, found the +settlers while they were yet living in tents, not having had time to +build houses. He robbed them of all their goods, afterward sending +them adrift in an open boat, to make certain they wouldn't encroach +on the land to which he believed they had no claim. + +The French people, after suffering severely, contrived to gain the +mainland, however, and before many months had passed returned to +Mount Desert, where they formed a settlement, which did not survive +the encroachments of the Indians, as is known from the fact that +when, in 1704, the great Indian fighter from Massachusetts, Major +Benjamin Church, rendezvoused at Mount Desert, before attacking the +Baron de Castine on Penobscot Bay, he found no person living there. + +In 1746 Stephen Pemberton and Silas Harding, with their wives, who +were sisters, and their children, emigrated from England to Acadia, +in Nova Scotia, hoping there to make better homes for themselves and +their little ones than could be had in their native land. Then came +the quarrels between the French and English, until Acadia was not a +very pleasant land in which to live, and these two settlers +determined to find an abiding-place where they might not be +literally overrun by the soldiers of two armies. + +Therefore it was that they built a small vessel, in which they could +carry all their household belongings, including two cows, three or +four pigs, and a flock of chickens, and started on a voyage that did +not come to an end until they were arrived at the island of Mount +Desert, near the mouth of what is now known as Duck Brook, within a +short distance of the present town of Bar Harbor. + +There the men built two small houses of logs, enclosed by a +palisade, which is a high fence formed by driving stakes into the +ground, for protection against the Indians, whom they had every +reason to fear. + +Here the two families lived in peace and comparative comfort until +the year 1758, and then there were children in plenty. + +Stephen Pemberton had in his family Mark, who was fifteen years old; +Luke, two years younger; Mary, aged eleven and John, a stout lad of +eight years. + +Silas Harding's children were Susan, who was fourteen years old; +Mary, four years younger, and James, who had lived seven years on +Mount Desert without having seen ten white people, save those +belonging to his own and Uncle Stephen Pemberton's family. + +Now after so many words which have not been strung together in a +very entertaining fashion, it is time to begin the story of what was +done by these children, with, as a matter of course, some assistance +from their mothers. + +Each summer, just before the work of harvesting should be begun, the +two men went out in the boat which had brought them from Acadia, to +catch fish enough for the winter's supply, and on this year they set +off early in September, with never a thought that any danger might +menace their dear ones after so many years of peace and comparative +prosperity. + +The children had work in plenty to keep them from idleness during +the week of ten days their fathers might be absent, and no sooner +had the little vessel sailed out of the harbor than they set about +their several tasks in order that all the labor might be performed +by the time the fishermen returned. + +Mark and Luke were engaged in setting up the flakes, or framework, +on which the fish were to be dried, and this labor was performed +near the shore of the harbor quite beyond sight of the homesteads +with the high palisade, which last hid from view all save the roofs +of the buildings. + +The _Future Hopes_, which was the name of the small vessel belonging +to the settlers, had left her moorings when the first gray light of +the coming day could be seen stealing over the waters, and while she +was yet close in-shore the two lads set about building the flakes, +counting on completing the task within three days, and to that end +working so industriously as to give little or no heed to what might +be passing around them. + +Therefore it was that they failed to see a canoe, in which were five +Indians, come swiftly up from the southward, past what is now known +as Pulpit Rock, and sail straight for the island at the mouth of the +harbor, which the people of to-day call Bar Island. + +Here the frail craft was hidden from view of the boys, and when half +an hour or more had gone by, another canoe, this one carrying six +men, executed the same maneuver. + +Five minutes later a third craft appeared, but just as she came in +view past the rock, Luke stood erect to drive in one of the stakes, +and, therefore, saw the strangers as they were evidently trying to +steal by without being seen. + +More than once since Luke could remember had Mount Desert been +visited by red men of the Abenakis tribe; but the visitors had +always approached boldly, like friends, and this skulking from rock +to island seemed much like a show of enmity. + +Certain it is that the lad was alarmed, but he understood, from what +his father had said many times, that it was not wise to let the +Indians know of his fear, and, continuing at the labor, he said, in +a low tone, to Mark: + +"Don't raise your head, nor look around. A canoe filled with +Abenakis has sneaked in behind the harbor island; can it be mischief +is intended?" + +"They may be after rock-cod, and count on coming ashore later," Mark +replied, continuing his work in such a fashion that he could look +seaward without seeming to do so. + +At this moment the occupants of the last canoe were moving around +the point of the island, as if to gain a position where a full view +of the buildings might be had, for there could be no possibility the +visitors were engaged in fishing, of any other such peaceful pursuit. + +"There's trouble of some kind, and it's for us to find out what," +Mark said, in a whisper. "There must have been other canoes than the +one you saw, for I have already counted eleven men on the island, +and they could not all have come in a single boat." + +The boys had had no experience, fortunately for them, in Indian +warfare, but they had heard enough from their parents to be fully +alive to the possibilities, and after a few moments, during which +time fear had held them speechless, Mark said, in a low tone, +although there was no chance the enemy could have heard him: + +"We must get over to the house without seeming to be running away. +You start first, and when you go through the gate, call out that +mother wants to see me." + +Luke obeyed leisurely, although his heart was beating so loudly and +heavily that it seemed as if it could be heard a long distance away, +and, arriving at the palisade, he summoned his brother, as had been +proposed. + +Then it was that Mark was at liberty to leave his work, and he +answered the summons more quickly, perhaps, than ever before in his +life. + +Mistress Pemberton was busily engaged inside the house, and the +other two children were in a small garden directly in the rear of +the building, therefore the boys were able to impart the +disagreeable tidings without alarming those who could be of little +or no assistance. + +"Indians skulking on the harbor island!" the good woman exclaimed, +when Mark had hurriedly told his story and her face paled as the +lads had never seen it before. + +"And they have chanced to come on the very day our father went +fishing!" Luke cried. + +"It wasn't chance that brought them, my son. Unless coming for some +evil purpose, they would have landed boldly, as they have done so +many times. It must be that the painted wretches have been watching +to learn when your father and uncle left the island! Ask your aunt +and Susan to come over her; the other children need not be told +until it is no longer possible to hold them in ignorance of what may +be done." + +Luke ran swiftly to the house, which stood hardly more than fifty +feet away, and in a twinkling Mistress Harding and her daughter +Susan were where they could hear what, to settlers in their +situation, was the worst possible news. + +[Illustration: "Indians skulking on the harbor island!"] + +Women who did their share in conquering the wilderness were not +cowardly, even though they might turn pale with apprehension when +the first note of danger was sounded, and there two, knowing it was +useless to expect aid from the outside, lost no time in planning a +defence. + +The palisade was weak in many places; more than one of the timbers +had decayed and fallen, for while the Indians from the near-by +mainland were friendly disposed, there seemed to be no good reason +why time and labor should be expended upon a means of defence which +might never be needed, and at this moment both the women bethought +themselves of such fact. + +"There may be time in which to strengthen the fence," Mistress +Harding suggested, and Mark, who considered himself as well-nigh +being a man grown, took the part of leader by saying, stoutly: + +"In can be done, aunt. Luke and I will get the timbers, and the +other children shall drag them out of the woods, coming into the +enclosure near the spring where the Indians cannot see them." + +"But surely we can do something to help the work along," his mother +said, quickly. + +"So you shall. We must know what the Indians are about, and you two +can take one of the small boys down near the shore. Stay there as if +bent on pleasuring, and, without seeming to do so, keep a sharp +watch on the harbor island. I will look after the rest." + +Boys who lived on the frontier in 1758 were accustomed to doing the +work of men, and very seldom was one found to be a coward. + +Now that danger in its most frightful form menaced, Mark Pemberton +understood that he must stand in the place of his father and uncle. +And there was no disposition on his part to shirk the +responsibility. He knew full well that there was no hope the +fishermen would return for at least a full week, therefore he must +work unaided, save as the women and other children might be able to +help him. + +The axes were near at hand; Mary Pemberton and Ellen Harding were +summoned from the garden, and the two younger boys sent with their +mothers to the shore. + +As the five young people went into the thicket, which had been left +standing in the rear of the dwellings that it might serve to break +the force of the north winds in the winter, the younger girls +learned of the painted peril on the harbor island, and Mark +explained his plan of defence, so far as he had formed one. + +The two boys set about their task feverishly, knowing that every +moment was precious, for no one could say when the attack might be +made; the only matter certain in the minds of all was that the +Indians had come bent on mischief, otherwise there would have been +no skulking on the island. + +The palisade, as originally built, stood six feet above the surface +of the land, and the posts were driven a good four feet into the +ground, therefore large timbers were necessary, and perhaps Mark was +the only member of the party who realized that when the work of +driving the logs in place was begun, the enemy would have a very +good idea of what was being done. + +The skulkers on the island must, as a matter of course, know that +they were discovered, and their purpose suspected, otherwise the +defences would not be in process of strengthening when the boys +should have been making ready for the curing of such fish as the +fishermen might bring in. + +Then was the moment when, possibly, the attack would be made, and +all preparations for resistance concluded before the first blow was +struck on the palisade. + +"There will be a moon to-night," Susan Harding said, quietly, and +Mark knew she was thinking of what might be expected after the sun +had set, therefore he replied, to encourage her: + +"Ay, Sue, the painted villains can't come across without showing +themselves for some time before gaining the beach, and Luke and I +should be able to warm their hides a bit." + +"I can shoot as well as you." + +"So you can, Sue and the worst part of it is that you must do your +share of the work." + +"Will you watch on the shore for them to-night?" + +"I think so. Luke and I can be there, while the rest of you are +inside." + +"I shall go with you," and the girl spoke as if demanding a part in +some scheme of pleasure. + +"Perhaps you can; we'll see what the plan shall be when night comes. +The fence may not be in shape then, and I'm hoping the Indians will +hold off for a darker night. That's about the only chance we've got +to save ourselves from being killed, or carried prisoners to Canada." + +"If they had landed on this island, they might have crept up without +our suspecting anything," Susan suggested, and Mark literally +trembled with fear, for thought came to his mind that possibly +another body of savages was on Mount Desert, counting on coming up +through the thicket when the attack was begun. + +However, as he said to himself a moment later, after struggling +manfully against this new fear which assailed him, that was a matter +which could not be guarded against, other than as the general +defences were strengthened, and it stood him in hand to think of +work rather than all which might happen. + +"Remember, I'm to take my place with you and Luke," Susan insisted, +and the lad, knowing she could be depended upon to use a musket +nearly as well as himself, replied: + +"So you shall, Sue; I promise to call on you as I would on Luke. +Here is the first timber," he added, as he struck the finishing +blows to the sharpened end of the log. "Drag it inside to the +weakest place in the fence, and take good care that you don't go +where any one on the harbor island can see you." + +Aided by Mary and Ellen, the stout-hearted girl set about the task +of carrying the heavy log, since that would be the quickest method +of getting it into place, and the boys plied their axes yet more +vigorously in order to have another timber in readiness when the +carriers returned. + +[Illustration: The stout-hearted girl set about the task.] + +"Take nothing smaller than six inches through the butt, and we'll +drive the tapering end into the ground," Mark cried, cheerily, as he +selected a second tree, and Luke had but just finished hewing his +log when the girls came for another load. + +"I ran down to talk with mother and aunt," Susan said, speaking with +difficulty because of her heavy breathing. "They have seen only one +Indian, who lies behind the big rock keeping watch, and he is +Sewattis, who came here for potatoes last winter." + +"And we gave him all he could carry away!" Mark exclaimed bitterly. +"Now he has come to try and murder us because we have ever been his +good friends." + +"Is there any war on the mainland?" Susan asked. + +"The captain of the last fishing-vessel father boarded told him that +an attack had been made by the French and Indians on the fort at St. +George last month, so I suppose England and France are still +fighting. If the two kings could be in our places just now, I reckon +there'd be an end of the war before nightfall." + +"It isn't three months since Master Peabody and his wife were killed +on Arrowsick Island, and the six children carried into Canada," +Luke suggested, grimly, and Mark cried, peremptorily: + +"Don't be digging up every horrible thing you can remember, for it +won't improve our courage, and we're like to need all we've got +between now and sunset. Here's another timber, Sue. Before you come +back again, get some idea of how many we're needing to put the fence +in shape." + +Luke would have talked of the murders which had been reported to the +settlers of the island by the fishermen, who were spoken from time +to time; but Mark bade him keep at his chopping, and in silence the +two worked until Susan, after an unusually long absence, returned. + +"There are seventeen logs missing," she reported, "and two more +which are decayed so badly that they should be replaced. I walked +slowly around the fence, and tried every one, to make certain it +stood firm." + +"We should be able to cut that number and get them in place before +the afternoon is very old," Mark replied, as he swung his axe yet +more vigorously. "Did you go down to the shore?" + +"Yes, and everything there is as it was before. Your mother thinks +it is a wicked waste of time for both to stay on guard, when it +would be possible for them to do so much toward helping in getting +out the timbers." + +"The moment will soon come when she can lend a hand, but just now +she is doing more good by staying where she is, for while those two +are idle the Indians will not suspect that we are strengthening our +defences. The other boys might help in dragging the logs down, Sue, +for we've got five or six ready." + +"Mary and I, with Ellen to steady them through the bushes, can soon +catch up with you, and the boys would be more bother than good," +Susan replied, as she raised one end of a heavy timber. + +During the next hour the five young people worked as industriously +as their elders could have done, and then Susan announced that her +mother was intending to make ready the noonday meal, for it was in +the highest degree necessary that those who were laboring so +energetically, and who would be called upon, perhaps, to spend the +night in watching, should have an ample supply of food. + +The boys ate dinner as they worked, Ellen bringing it out to them, +and, while Mistress Harding cooked for both families, Mistress +Pemberton remained on guard. + +During all that time very little had been learned regarding the +savages. Now and then a painted face had been seen momentarily from +behind one of the rocks on the harbor island; but nothing more, and +the defenders of the stockade had no means of knowing when the +attack might be expected. + +It was about two hours past noon when the boys had cut the necessary +number of timbers, and now was come the time when the enemy would +get an inkling that the settlers were making ready to defend +themselves. + +"You can't help us very much, Sue, when we are driving the posts +into place," Mark said. "Leave Ellen here, while you overhaul our +muskets. See to it that each one is loaded, and where we can get at +it readily. After that has been done, you had best stand by the +gateway to give the work if any move is made by the villains." + +Then the boys began the task of setting the timbers in place, +fearing each instant to hear the word that the savages were crossing +over from the small island. + +When the third timber had been driven in place, Mark said, grimly, +as he raised another stick to fit it into the palisade: + +"If they come now, we shall be in a bad scrape; but in case they are +foolish enough to wait until after dark, I reckon we can give a good +account of ourselves." + +In order to drive the logs sufficiently deep into the earth, to +prevent the possibility of their being pulled out by the foe, it was +necessary for one of the boys to stand on an up-ended cask, and +while in suck position a view of the tiny island at the mouth of the +harbor could readily be had. + +It was Mark who swung the heavy wooden maul, or mallet, and he +strove to keep his eyes fixed upon that point of land behind which +he knew the Indians lurked. + +To his great relief, no change was apparent in the position of the +enemy, although those in hiding must have known what was being done, +and the boys worked unmolested. + +After she had make ready the muskets for immediate use, Susan +stationed herself at the gateway of the palisade, with a weapon +leaning against the logs on the inside, watching intently, and after +half an hour had passed Mark called to her: + +"There's little chance now that they'll begin the mischief before +dark, if the noise of our pounding hasn't started them. Mother and +aunt may come back here and do some more cooking, for once the +Abenakis begin work we shall need to have all hands on duty. You can +keep an eye on the island from where you are." + +[Illustration: Susan stood guard at the gateway.] + +This change was welcomed by the women, who came up from the shore +quickly, stopping at the palisade to see how the lads were getting +along, when Mistress Pemberton said to Mark: + +"I have been thinking that we had better gather in one of the +buildings which can be barricaded on the inside, instead of trying +to occupy both." + +"It's a good idea, mother dear, and while you're making the changes, +see to it that we have plenty of water in the house." + +"What about the cows?" + +"We can't take the chances of going after them, for no one can say +that there are not more Indians hidden in the woods. If the beasts +come home, we'll have a mess of milk to help out on the supplies." + +Now it was that every member of the two families was actively +engaged, while Susan stood guard at the gateway. + +The Harding house was stripped of everything which could be readily +moved, and the rude furniture served admirably as a barricade for +the windows and one door of the Pemberton dwelling. + +The sun had not set when Mark had put the palisade into the best +condition possible with the materials at his command, and then, +after cautioning Susan to keep her eyes open very wide, the two boys +began making loopholes in the house which was to shelter both +families. This last was being done, as Mark explained to his mother, +that they might have a final place of refuge in case the Indians +succeeded in scaling the palisade. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +THE FIRST ASSAULT + + +Not until the shadows of night were beginning to lengthen was Susan +relieved from guard duty, and then the gate had been closed and +barred by Mark, who said to his cousin: + +"There is little chance an attack will be made until after night has +come, when they count on finding us asleep, mayhap, although it +would be queer people who could close their eyes in rest while a +crowd of men was waiting for a good opportunity to kill them." + +"Why am I to go off duty?" Susan asked. "Surely it can do us no harm +to stand guard, and even though the savages do not make any move, we +should act as if believing they might do so at any moment." + +"You are right, Sue, and I warrant you won't have many idle minutes. +Your mother and mine want all the children together while they pray +for the good God to help us, and surely He is the only one to whom +we can appeal now." + +The girl made no further parley, but marched directly toward the +Pemberton house, stopping very suddenly, however, as a low sound, +not unlike the call of a human being, was heard from the woods in +the rear of the dwellings. + +"There are the cows, Mark, and surely they must be brought inside +the enclosure if for no other reason than that we may need the milk +before those murderers--" + +Susan did not finish the sentence, for the thought had come that it +was not unlikely those who were skulking on the harbor island might +succeed in their purpose, as they had done so many times before when +setting forth to capture and to murder. + +"I'll go after the beasts, and you shall stand here to keep watch +over the harbor, for I am not minded to take the chances of being +surprised, ever though we have good reason to believe no mischief +will be attempted until late in the night." + +To this Susan would not agree. She insisted that, having been +charged with the care of the cows during so many years, they would +follow her more readily than any other, and it might be possible +something would happen to frighten them. + +Mark, who feared there were Indians hidden in the thicket, would +have prevented her from venturing out of the stockade; but she put +an end to the controversy by slipping through the gate immediately +he had opened it, and the lad could do no less than remain on guard +while she was absent. + +The animals followed the girl contentedly when she appeared before +them, even though they were not accustomed to being brought within +the enclosure during the warm season, and as they filed through the +gate Mark felt decidedly more comfortable in mind, for now, in case +they were able to hold the Indians in check, there was no +possibility of a lack of food if the siege should be prolonged. + +With the cows in the shed that served as stable during the winter +months, where was a plentiful supply of hay which had been made +during the summer, the children went into the house, which seemed +strangely changed by the addition of Mistress Harding's belongings +and preparations already made for defence. + +Nearly all the rude furniture was piled against the two windows and +one of the doors, and the beds had been spread on the floor where +they would best be screened from any stray bullets. A supply of fuel +was stacked up near the fireplace, to the end that it might be +possible to prepare food without necessity of going out of doors, +and, as Mark had suggested, every available vessel was filled with +water. + +When the three children, who had been doing such valiant work in +strengthening the defences, entered the building, they found the +women and smaller children gathered close beside each other as if +such near companionship lessened the danger, and Mark said, gently: + +"It is not well that we stay indoors many minutes, mother dear, for +much remains to be done before night has fully come." + +Then it was, and without delay, that Mistress Pemberton knelt amid +the frightened brood, pouring forth her supplications for strength +and guidance in this their time of peril, and the children listened +to the petition as they had never done before. It was as if the +prayer had a different meaning than ever before, for unless it +should be answered then was the time of suffering or of death come +very near. + +Even the youngest children understood that this was the only appeal +for help which could be made, and never a question was asked or a +word spoken when Mark, Luke, and Susan, rising to their feet +immediately the petition had been brought to a close went +out-of-doors muskets in hand. + +When they were in the open air once more Mark proposed that they +make such platforms behind the palisade as was practical with the +limited amount of material at hand, in order that, in event of an +attack, it would be possible to use their weapons with good effect +to prevent the enemy from scaling the barricade. + +Two up-ended casks formed as many stations, while at other points +the wash-benches, tubs, horses for wood-sawing, and household +utensils were piled up or pushed unto position at such height as +would afford a view of the harbor island and the intervening space. + +When this work had been completed the children had eight improvised +platforms whereon they could stand while defending the stockade, and +the night was fully come. + +[Illustration: The children had improvised platforms.] + +As Susan had said, the moon was in the third quarter, therefore it +would be impossible for the Indians to paddle across the waters of +the harbor without exposing themselves to the view of the island +defenders. + +It was a portion of Mark's plan that a guard should be stationed on +the shore, in full sight of those who might approach, and, in event +of an advance, the battle would be begun while the enemy was in the +canoes. + +This much he explained to his companions, as they stood by the gate +ready to face the more immediate danger to the end that their loved +ones might the better be protected, and he added, in conclusion: + +"After all we've seen it would be foolish to pretend we do not know +why the Abenakis have come, therefore when they put out from the +island, I shall hail them once, warning all hands to stay where they +are until the sun has risen, after which we will open fire, trying +to do the greatest possible amount of execution in order to show +what may be expected. I've got four of five charges of ammunition, +and if the rest of you have as much we shall be able to make quite a +showing." + +At that moment the noise of someone moving across the enclosure +startled the children; but an instant later they saw that Mistress +Harding was going toward the shed to milk the cows. + +"Now come on," Mark said, opening the gate after learning the cause +of his momentary alarm, and the children went boldly forth to do +battle--two boys and a girl who counted on defending the island +against fifteen or twenty savages. + +It was not to e supposed that the Indians, seeing the sentinels, +would come directly across from the island; but might be expected to +dart swiftly toward one or the other headlands, and therefore it was +that Mark divided his small force, sending Luke to patrol the +northern point, while he paced to and fro on the southern side of +the harbor where it was more reasonable to suppose a landing would +be attempted. Susan was to walk back and forth on the shore between +the two lads. + +Once this division of forces had been made, the children began their +vigil, on the alert for any suspicious noises either behind or in +front of them, for there was yet a possibility that a force of +Indians was already secreted near the stockade. + +No sooner had he begun to pace his beat than Mark realized to what +danger the occupants of the dwelling were exposed in case the +savages had already landed on Mount Desert, for the gate of the +palisade was unlocked and unguarded, and then Susan was sent back to +warn her mother and aunt that the entrance must be secured. + +When she returned to the shore it was with the report that the gate +was barred on the inside, and Mary Pemberton standing close beside +it in case the sentinels outside should be forced to beat a hasty +retreat. + +Now indeed had the lad done all within his power to protect those +whom he considered were entrusted to his charge, and it only +remained to keep careful watch for the first show of mischief. + +And this came in a manner wholly unexpected, although it seemed to +the young leader as if he had taken into consideration every method +which might be adopted by the savages. + +During three hours or more the children had paced to and fro on the +shore, each making certain meanwhile that the other two were on the +alert, and then Mark saw a canoe put off from the harbor island, +heading toward Pulpit Rock, as if to gain the shelter of that +headland before coming to land. + +Uttering a low cry to attract the attention of his companions, he +would have hurried on to the point in order to fire at least one +shot before the Indians could disembark; but at that moment an +exclamation from Luke caused him to gaze across the harbor, when he +saw a second canoe setting out toward the northward. + +A moment later a third craft was paddled straight across the water, +in the direction of Susan's post of duty. + +It seemed certain that the Abenakis understood how small and weak +was the force opposed to them, and therefore, counted on bringing +their bloody work to a speedy conclusion regardless of their +ordinary methods of warfare. + +[Illustration: Mark saw a canoe put off from the harbor island.] + +A landing would be made at three different places simultaneously, +and the young defenders must perforce give all their attention to +one party, leaving the others to do as they pleased, or, by +attempting to guard every point, place themselves in the greatest +possible danger. + +"Make ready to run for the house when I give the word," Mark cried +to his companions. "Come this way, Sue, and Luke, do the best you +can at peppering the canoe in front of us!" + +Susan speedily joined her cousin on the southerly side of the +harbor, while Luke stood his ground, but with the disagreeable +knowledge that in a few moments the savages would probably be +creeping up behind him. + +Now Mark understood that he could not afford to spend many moments +on this portion of the defence. It was necessary the three should be +inside the stockade before those who were landing at either point of +the harbor could come up within range, and he said to Susan: + +"We must get in our work quickly, for I reckon these villains in +front of us will take good care to move so slowly as to keep at a +safe distance until the others are ready for work." + +For reply the girl raised her musket on the crutch-like rest which +was used in those days, took careful aim, and pulled the trigger. + +It was possible to see the bullet as it struck the moonlit water, +hardly more than three paces in advance of the canoe, with its +freight of painted terrors, and instantly the Indians ceased +paddling, thus proving that they had no intention of coming within +range until their comrades from the other craft were in position to +prosecute their murderous work. + +"There is little sense in our staying here," Mark said, bitterly. +"Those scoundrels don't intend to give us any show at them, and we +are foolish if we remain. Yonder canoe put off boldly only to keep +us occupied until the others could make a landing." + +"Are we to go back?" Susan asked, striving to prevent a tremor of +fear from being perceptible in her voice. + +"Ay, it is high time. You start on ahead, and I'll call Luke." + +"I shall walk by your side," the girl said, stoutly. "We will share +the danger equally, as you promised." + +"You are a good girl, Sue; just the kind that will do a full half of +the work of defending the island," and Mark kissed her on the cheek +more tenderly than he had ever done before, as one would who was +whispering a final good-bye. + +"Close in, Luke; we must get back to the house; there's no show of +our being able to do anything here," Mark cried to his brother, as +he set the example by leading Susan in the direction of the stockade. + +The canoe came forward more swiftly as the little party of children +retreated; but it could be seen that its occupants did not count on +approaching within range, and Mark hastened his brother's movements +by shouting: + +"Run for it, lad! We must be in position behind the fence when the +brutes first come within view!" + +Then the three went toward the place of refuge at full speed, and +behind the gate, having been warned by the report of her cousin's +musket, Mary Pemberton stood ready to let down the heavy bar when +the little party was near at hand. + +The retreat had been begun none too soon, as was seen when the +children came within the enclosure, for while Mark was replacing the +bar which locked the gate, his mother, standing on one of the +improvised platforms, discharged a musket. + +"What have you seen?" the lad cried, as, the gate having been +fastened, he ran toward that portion of the stockade where was his +mother. + +"An Indian came out just beyond the dead tree, over there." + +"Did you hit him?" + +"I'm afraid not, Mark; I never could send a bullet straight, and am +now blaming myself for not having practiced more often after your +father insisted that the time might come when I would need to handle +a musket deftly." + +By this time Mark stood by his mother's side, peering cautiously out +over the top of the palisade, which was not a simple matter, since +he took the risk of presenting the enemy with a target. + +He could see nothing suspicious, and was yet peering eagerly around, +when the report of a musket rang out on the other side of the +stockade. + +It was Susan who fired the shot. At the same moment Mark clambered +up beside his mother, the girl had taken her station on one of the +casks at a point overlooking the thicket, and the result showed that +she had arrived there none too soon. + +"Did you see an Indian?" Luke asked, as he mounted one of the +wash-benches near the gate. + +"Ay, and hit him, too!" Susan replied, grimly, as she turned to +recharge her weapon; but Mistress Harding took the empty musket +from her hands, as she said: + +"Your aunt and I cannot shoot as well as you children; but we may, +at least, be of service in loading the guns." + +From this moment there was little delay in making the assault. +Contrary to their custom, the Abenakis pressed forward immediately +after the first shot was fired, doubtless hoping to gain an +advantage while the defenders were reloading the weapons, and each +of the three children fired two shots as rapidly as the muskets +could be handed to them. + +Three times had a piercing scream followed the report of the weapon, +thus telling that an equal number of bullets had hit the targets, +and then the savages became more cautious. + +Until this moment the Indians had not fired a shot; but now the +bullets began to whistle over the heads of those who were exposed to +view, as the Abenakis, themselves screened by the bushes, began the +real attack. + +"Be careful of yourselves!" Mark cried, forgetting to set his +companions an example. "Keep down behind the posts as much as +possible; we can count on their staying under cover while doing so +much shooting!" Then, turning to his mother, he added, "There is no +reason why all the children should be out-of-doors, where a stray +bullet may find them. Why not order them into the house?" + +This Mistress Pemberton did, and when the younger members of the +company were in comparative safety, Mark looked anxiously around at +his army of two. + +Luke was crouching behind the palisade, where a wide crevice between +two of the posts afforded him a view of the outside without his +being obliged to expose himself, and Susan was leaning against the +timbers, only partially sheltered, as she appeared to be tying +something around her arm. + +"What are you doing, Sue?" Mark cried, in alarm. + +"Standing guard here; but just now I can't see anything that looks +like an Indian." + +"What is the matter with your arm?" + +"It's only a scratch," the girl replied, in a matter-of-fact tone. +"It bleeds a little, and I've wrapped a piece of my gown around it." + +"You're wounded!" Mark cried, and he made as if to jump down from +the platform, when Susan said, sharply: + +"Stay where you are! Even though I was hurt badly, which I'm not, +you have no right to leave the fence unguarded." + +Mark stepped back with a certain sense of shame that it had been +necessary for Susan to remind him of his duty, and then Mistress +Harding went to her daughter's side. + +"It is a slight wound on the left arm," the good woman said, after +insisting on an examination of the injury. "I will take her to the +house while I tie it up properly, and Ellen may stand here in her +place." + +"But Ellen can't use a musket as well as I, and we're needed here," +Susan cried, more concerned lest she be forced to leave her station +at the palisade than on account of the wound. + +Mistress Harding might have insisted on her daughter's going into +the building if at that moment the assault had not been renewed, and +during the next ten minutes the defenders were actively employed. + +The Indians, profiting by the teachings and example of the +Frenchmen, whose allies they were, had divided the force, a portion +remaining hidden in the thicket to fire at the children, while the +remainder made a rush for the gate, as if believing it might be +forced open. + +Now it was that the defenders were obliged to move quickly, and it +was impossible for them to remain under cover all the while. + +"Pour all the fire into those fellows who are coming up with the +log!" Mark cried, as half a dozen Abenakis, carrying a heavy +tree-trunk, to be used as a battering-ram, made ready to advance at +full speed. + +This command was obeyed with such good effect that three of the +savages fell, and their fellows, dropping the timber, ran to cover +with the greatest possible haste. + +At the same moment the children fired, the Indians in hiding +discharged their weapons, detonations being echoed and reechoed +from mountain to mountain, until it sounded as if a severe +engagement was in progress. + +"Any one hurt?" Mark cried, and Susan and Luke replied cheerily in +the negative. + +One of the three Indians wounded while advancing with the tree-trunk +succeeded in crawling off to the shelter of the underbrush; but the +other two remained where they had fallen. + +When, two or three minutes later, an Abenakis darted out from his +place of concealment, Mark raised his weapon quickly; but Susan +cried, warningly: + +"Don't fire! It can do us no harm if they take away the wounded, and +it's possible they'll go back to the harbor island, if the injured +can be carried off!" + +"I'm beginning to think it is you who should be in command here," +Mark said, half to himself, as he lowered his weapon. "You've got +more sound sense than Luke and I together." Then, raising his voice, +he cried, loudly, "Listen, ye Abenakis, whom our fathers have fed +when you were hungry, and sheltered when you were cold, but who +would murder us now! Take away your wounded, if you are minded to go +back to the harbor island, and no one shall harm you while so doing. +The white men of Mount Desert have never broken faith with you, nor +will we, their children." + +Then was done that which proves how much stranger than fiction is +truth. The Abenakis, although they had come there to kill or make +prisoners the wives and children of those men who had ever been +their friends, did not question the faith of the lad when he +announced that they might bear off the wounded in safety, but boldly +advanced within short range to the aid of their fellows. + +"Why do you seek to kill us, who have never done you harm?" Mark +cried, when four of the band stood in full view while lifting the +wounded from the ground. "Do Indians kill their friends? Do they +speak soft words only while the men of the family are at home, being +too cowardly to make an attack until the fathers have gone away?" + +There was no reply to this speech until the Indians were hidden once +more by the bushes, and then a voice cried: + +"Give us the cow and two boys. Then we will go away, telling the +Frenchmen that all have been killed." + +"You shall not have the smallest chicken inside this stockade!" Mark +cried, angrily. "And I promise that there shall be few left to +report to the cowardly Frenchmen, if you remain here very long. You +shall be shot down like dogs, and from this out our squaws will not +interfere to let you carry off those who have been crippled!" + +While speaking, Mark had unconsciously raised himself to his full +height, instead of being partially sheltered by remaining in a +crouching position, as during the short fight, and the reply to his +words came in the form of bullets, one of which grazed his cheek, +raising a red ridge, as if he had been scored by a whip-lash. + +Susan and Luke both fired in the direction from which had been seen +the flash of the muskets, but no one could say if the missiles thus +sent at random took effect. + +Five minutes later, while the watchers still gazed through the +crevices of the palisade, believing the enemy to be near at hand, a +canoe was seen putting off from the shore, directly in front of the +dwellings, and, after such delay as was necessary, in order to +enable them to reach the other craft, all three divisions of the +attacking force were headed for the harbor island. + +[Illustration: "You shall not have the smallest chicken inside this +stockade!"] + +The first assault had been made, and successfully resisted. It now +remained to be seen whether the Abenakis were willing to accept this +as defeat, of if new tactics were to be tried. + +"They've gone!" Susan cried, joyfully. "We've beaten them!" + +"Yes child," her mother said, despondently, "and if they had not +been sent by Frenchmen, we might believe the worst was over." + +"Do you think they'll come back, Mark?" the girl cried, as she +leaped down from her post of duty. + +"Ay, that I do, Susan, and for the very reason aunt has given. If we +could only know what the next move would be! I have heard father say +that once upon a time the English drove away from Mount Desert +French settlers, and now those who are stirring the Indians up to +this kind of business are trying to make things even. We can count +on having peace during the rest of the night, I believe, and the +sooner you go into the house, were that wound of yours can be looked +after, the better I shall be pleased." + +Indeed, there was no good reason why all the defenders, save one to +stand guard behind the palisade, should not get such repose as might +be had under the circumstances. + +A sentinel, on one of the hastily constructed platforms, could keep +the harbor island well in view, therefore the savages would not be +able to leave it secretly, and Mark proposed that he remain on duty +for a certain time, while the others slept. + +"You shall have my place in a couple of hours, Luke." the lad said +to his brother. + +"And when do I take my turn?" Susan asked, showing that she was +determined to do a full share in the defence, regardless of her +wound. + +"You may stand guard when it is time for Luke to lie down," Mark +replied, intending that she should not be awakened if he could +prevent it. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +A DAY OF SUSPENSE + + +While Mark stood on guard, able to see the entire broad expanse of +water, thanks to the light of the moon, he knew that so long as a +careful watch was kept the Abenakis could not leave the harbor +island secretly; but he also realized that if the clouds should +gather, or a fog settle down over the waters, then, of a verity, +would they be at the mercy of a foe from whom no mercy could be +expected. + +The fact that they had been able to resist the first assault did not +give him encouragement for the future. The Indians had advanced +foolishly, understanding that the white people knew full well what +they were about, and after this first repulse it was reasonable to +suppose the murderous scoundrels would bring all their cunning into +play when the next attack was made. + +There were six muskets in the stockade, and ammunition sufficient to +last during an ordinary siege, provided none was wasted, yet but +three persons--Susan, Luke, and himself--could be depended upon to +man the walls. The others would have served faithfully, of that +there was no question; but none of them were so expert with a musket +as to be counted on for any great execution. + +Although the lad would not have admitted as much to either of his +companions, the fear in his heart that the enemy might succeed in +accomplishing his purpose was very great. + +"We can count on it that at the next attack they will succeed in +getting inside the palisade," he said, unconsciously giving words to +his thoughts, and he started almost in alarm as a familiar voice +behind him asked, reproachfully: + +"If you lose heart, how can the rest of us be expected to show +courage?" + +"What are you doing out here, Sue?" he asked, in turn, not minded to +answer her question, if it could be avoided. + +"I've come to take Luke's place. He is sleeping so soundly that it +is a pity to awaken him, and the pain in my arm keeps my eyes open +very wide." + +"But I haven't been here two hours yet." + +"Nearly half that time has passed since you came on duty, and there +is no reason why you should remain awake when it's impossible for me +to sleep. I can keep a sharp watch." + +"So you can, Sue; but it is my place to take the biggest end, and I +don't fancy the idea of letting a woman do my work." + +"If I could go to sleep it would be different; but since I can't, I +shall stay here, therefore you might as well take advantage of the +opportunity." + +Mark made no move toward leaving the platform, from which he could +have a full view of the harbor, and, seeing that he was not disposed +to act upon her suggestion, Susan clambered up beside him. + +"Now tell me what you meant by saying that the next time they come +the Indians will get inside the fence?" + +"There's no sense in talking about that. I didn't count on speaking +aloud." + +"You did, however, and now it will be treating me no more than +fairly if you tell me exactly what is in your mind." + +Mark had no desire to discuss the situation just then, when it +looked very dark to him, and, in order to avoid answering the +question, he proposed to take advantage of Susan's proposition. + +"Since you are determined to stay here, I may as well get what sleep +I can. Call Luke when you are tired," He said, and before she could +detain him he had slipped down from the improvised platform, walking +rapidly toward the dwelling. + +The girl could do guard duty as well as either of her cousins, and +was eager to perform a full share of the labor devolving upon those +who were striving to hold the savages in check. Perhaps she +magnified the pain of her wound in order to be allowed to take +Mark's place, and, if such was the case, the defence would be in no +wise weakened through her. + +Until the first faint light of a new day could be seen did Susan +Harding stand on the narrow platform, watching eagerly for any signs +of life from the harbor island, and unable to change her position, +save by taking two or three paces to the right or left. Even then +she would have remained on duty longer, but that Mark came hurriedly +out of the house crying, angrily: + +"It was not fair for you to stay on watch all night, Sue! You the +same as promised to call Luke when you were tired." + +"I didn't really agree, and I'm not tired yet. There's no need of +your coming up here, for now that it is daylight, Ellen can be +trusted to keep a lookout over the island." + +"When she has eaten her breakfast I will let her take my place," +Mark replied, as he literally forced the girl to descend, and a few +moments later all the occupants of the stockade were astir. + +The cows were milked, but kept within the enclosure, the young boys +feeding and watering them. The hens were allowed to stray here or +there at will, and, save for the sentinels on the palisade, one +might have thought that the scene presented there represented +perfect peace and happiness. + +When the morning meal had been prepared, Ellen Harding took Mark's +station on the stockade, being enjoined by him to keep her eyes +fixed constantly on the harbor island, without heeding what might be +happening around her, as the little company gathered in the +Pemberton house, where thanks were given for their preservation +during the night. + +While breakfast was in progress no reference was made to the danger +which menaced; it seemed as if the women feared to alarm the younger +children, and the three to whom the defence of the island had been +committed were not desirous of starting a conversation which might +lead up to the possibilities of the future. + +Susan was forced to submit to a second treatment of her wound, as +soon as the meal had had come to an end, and Mistress Harding +peremptorily insisted on her going to bed, since she had not closed +her eyes in slumber during the night just passed. + +Mistress Pemberton set about melting lead for bullets, the store of +missiles being smaller than that of powder, and Mark and Luke went +out to make a more thorough examination of the palisade. + +"It isn't very likely that the Abenakis will make any move during +this day," the elder lad said, "and while Ellen is standing watch it +would be wicked to lose any chance of making our position yet more +secure." + +Luke was ready to act upon his brother's suggestion, but appeared to +have no desire for conversation, and Mark did not urge him to talk, +for the same reason that had caused him to hold his peace during the +breakfast hour. + +There was much that had been overlooked during the hurry and +excitement of the previous day, which could be done to strengthen +the palisade, as, for example, driving stakes at the foot of such +posts as were not standing firmly, and securing the tops of others +with braces on the inside. + +In order to do a portion of this work, it was necessary the lads +should go into the thicket for material; but while Ellen remained on +watch to give the alarm, in case she saw any signs of life on the +harbor island, they did not hesitate to leave the stockade. + +It was while they were chopping down small trees in the rear of the +dwellings, that the flock of fourteen sheep came in sight, and these +Mark decided to drive into the enclosure. + +It would be a serious blow to the settlers if these wool-growers +should be killed by the enemy, for it might be a difficult task to +replace them, and without the fleeces each summer the children would +be destitute of materials for clothing. + +By catching the leader of the flock, and dragging him along by the +horns, the lads had little trouble in getting the animals within the +stockade, and Mark announced his success by saying, in a tone of +mild triumph: + +"The family is all behind one fence now, and unless the Abenakis get +inside, they can't do us a great deal of harm." + +"But the sheep will pull heavily on our store of hay," Luke +suggested, and his brother replied, cheerily: + +"They can pick up a good bit around the place, and it won't do any +very great harm to let them go hungry now and then. It's better than +taking good chances of losing the whole drove." + +There was no further discussion as to the advisability of bringing +the sheep into the stockade, for at that moment a cry from Ellen +caused both the boys to run, with all speed, to her side. + +"Look! Look! A vessel! It must be that fishermen are coming here, +and now the Indians will be driven away!" + +[Illustration: "Look! Look! A vessel!"] + +To their great surprise and delight, the boys saw a small schooner, +coming as if from the mainland on the northward, heading directly +for the harbor island. + +"We're saved, God be thanked!" Mark cried, in a tone so loud as to +be heard by the inmates of the house, all of whom came swiftly +toward him to learn the cause of the fervent exclamation. + +"What is it, my son?" Mistress Pemberton asked, sharply, and Luke +shouted, as he pointed seaward: + +"A fishing-vessel, mother, and those on board must soon know that +the Indians are besieging us!" + +"But she appears to be going directly to the harbor island! The crew +should be warned, lest the Abenakis make an attack upon them!" + +This possibility had not entered Mark's mind; but while his mother +was yet speaking he darted out of the stockade, running with all +speed to the shore, waving his arms and shouting, to attract the +attention of the newcomers. + +He was followed by the two families, including Susan, who had been +awakened by the joyful cries, and the little party ran swiftly along +the beach until they were come to the nearest point of the island, +which was the small bluff, or incline, on the westernmost end. + +Here it was possible to have in view the schooner's deck, and that +their signals had been seen seemed positive, although no attention +was taken of them. + +"Had you not better pull out in the small boat?" Mistress Pemberton +asked of Mark, when the strangers failed to pay any heed to the +gestures of warning. "It would be dreadful if the men went on shore +and were murdered!" + +There seemed to be no reason why the lads should not visit the +vessel, and, in fact, such an idea had entered Mark's mind before +his mother spoke, but yet he hesitated to act upon her suggestion, +although it would have been impossible for him to explain why he +remained idle. + +"The schooner carries a big crew for a fisherman," Susan said, +thoughtfully. "There must be as many as twenty-five or thirty on her +deck." + +"She's no fisherman!" Mark cried, becoming perplexed as he observed +the truth of what Susan had said. "So many people never could work +on a craft of that size." + +"But what else can she be?" Luke asked, curiously, "I don't know as +it makes much difference to us, though, so long as she carries a +crew of white people. Why don't we pull out to her, Mark? Look, +she's coming to anchor, and if her crew lands without knowing of the +Abenakis, they will all be killed!" + +"There are the Indians!" Susan cried, as three canoes, filled with +savages, were seen putting out from the shore. + +"They are going to make an attack on the vessel, and we can do +nothing to help the poor people!" Mistress Pemberton cried, in an +agony of grief, while an expression of terror overspread Mark's face +as he began to have an inkling of the true situation. + +"Can't you boys do something to aid the men?" Mistress Harding +asked, and Mark replied: + +"It isn't likely they're needing any help. Those on the vessel +outnumber the Abenakis three to one, and I'm afraid they won't have +any trouble in taking care of themselves." + +No one save Susan gave any particular heed to Mark's words, but +watched with feverish interest as the canoes approached the vessel, +and then, when the Indians clambered aboard without any attempt +being made to prevent them, the expression of the face of the +spectators changed from that of sympathy to perplexity. + +"The Abenakis seem to know the fishermen," Mistress Pemberton said +to herself, and Mark replied, bitterly: + +"Ay, mother, that they do, and now, instead of being called upon to +defend ourselves against Indians only, we shall have that crowd of +Frenchmen against us!" + +"God forbid that white people could attack women and children!" +Mistress Harding cried fervently, and Mark added: + +"He hasn't forbidden it so far, aunt. Don't you remember what father +and uncle heard from those aboard of the last vessel they spoke +with? They were told that when Master Peabody and his wife were +murdered, there were ten French soldiers with the Indians." + +"Can it be that they have come to aid the savages against us?" and +Mistress Harding's face grew pale. + +"Ay, that is the way the French king fights us in this country, and +if we are murdered it will be because his agents have decided upon +it in revenge for that which was done here so many years ago to the +missionaries!" + +And now while the little party of besieged stands on the shore +facing this new and unexpected peril, suppose we set down that +which Mr. Williamson wrote in his "History of Maine." + +"A communication was received at Boston in August, 1758, from +Brigadier-General Monkton, stationed in Nova Scotia, which stated +that a body of Frenchmen, in conjunction with the Indians of the +rivers St. John, Penobscot, and probably Passamaquoddy, were +meditating an attempt upon the fort at St. Georges, and the +destruction of all the settlements on the coast." + +"Immediately Governor Pownal collected such a military force as was +at command, and embarked with them on board the King George, and the +sloop Massachusetts. Arriving, he threw these auxiliaries with some +warlike stores into the fort at a most fortunate juncture; for +within thirty-six hours after the departure the fort was actually +assailed by a body of four hundred French and Indians." + +"But so well prepared was the garrison to receive them, that they +were unable to make the least impression. Nor did any +representations of their numbers, nor any threats, communicated to +the fort by a captive woman, whom they purposely permitted to escape +hither, occasion the least alarm. Hence, the besiegers gave vent to +their resentiments and rage by killing the neighboring cattle, about +sixty of which they shot or butchered." + +It was well for the little families who were so sorely beset that +they remained in ignorance of what the French assisted by the +Indians of several tribes, were trying to do, otherwise their +despair would have been even greater than it was as they watched +the reception of the Abenakis by those on board the schooner. + +It will never be known whether this attack on Mount Desert was made +in revenge for what had been done by Argall to the French +missionaries; but certain it was that all the settlements on the +coast, large or small, had been marked for destruction under the +guise of legitimate warfare. + +During five minutes or more, while the besieged watched the +movements on the deck of the schooner until there was no longer any +question but that the number of their enemies had been largely +increased, not a word was spoken, and then Mistress Harding broke +the painful stillness by exclaiming: + +"There is nothing left us to do but submit! With French soldiers at +hand, it is not probable the savages will be allowed to murder their +prisoners, and to surrender the island is better than being killed!" + +"The French have never done anything toward preventing the Indians +from working their will on the helpless captives. Do you remember +the story father tells of Falmouth, when these same Frenchmen +pledged their words of honor that no blood should be spilled, and +yet many of those who surrendered were murdered in cold blood?" + +"But what other can we do save give ourselves up?" Mistress Harding +cried, helplessly, and Susan stepped proudly by the side of Mark, as +he replied, stoutly: + +"We can fight to the last, and die with muskets in our hands, +instead of going willingly to meet the scalping-knife or the +tomahawk. It may be that those on the mainland will learn what is +being done here, and come to our relief." + +"Do not put faith in such a possibility, my son. It is better to +face the worst than build on hopes which must be dashed," and +Mistress Pemberton laid her hand on Mark's shoulder as if in pride +because of the courage he displayed. "We will do battle against +these people, white and red, and when our best has been done, the +end will be no worse than if we submitted tamely." + +"That's the way to put it!" Mark cried, kissing his mother's hand. +"We had planned to defend ourselves against the savages, and now let +us see what shall be done since they have had such a large +reinforcement. Certain it is that we must not stand here, for they +may have muskets aboard the schooner which will carry a ball farther +than ours." + +Mistress Pemberton led the way back to the stockade, and there, in +the open air near the gateway where a close watch might be kept over +both the island and the vessel, she commended the little party to +the care of Him who watches over even the sparrow's fall. + +It was to the distressed company as if the entire situation had been +suddenly changed; as if their means of defence were totally +inadequate, leaving them to the mercy of the French and Indians, who +were making the attack simply because the King of England and the +King of France had sundry differences of opinion, which might be +settled by spilling the blood of innocent people. + +Susan, who had been the most courageous, seemed to have grown +timorous when she asked, while she and Mark were where the words +could not be overheard: + +"What shall we do? Is there any hope we can hold back such a force +as is being arrayed against us?" + +"It doesn't seem possible, Sue, and yet we must fight to the last, +rather than give over our mothers and you girls to what we know will +follow if we show the white feather." + +"I am not afraid of your ever doing anything of that kind, Mark," +and the girl laid her hand on his shoulder with a loving gesture. +"You will always be brave and true; but what I am asking is whether +we may do anything which, as yet, has not been tried." + +"I exhausted all my ideas in arranging for a defence against the +Abenakis, and now we must stand up like images, fighting until we +are destroyed. Anything is better than tame surrender, when we know +by the terrible experiences of others what will follow." + +"In that I am of your mind, Mark, dear; but I am asking if there +isn't something else, which, as yet, we have neglected, that can be +done. Our mothers depend on you, as do I, which is only natural, +since you are the eldest, and should of right take your father's +place." + +"It is just that, Sue dear, which causes me to be afraid of my own +ideas. If I make a mistake, it may be fatal to you all, for you will +follow my advice." + +"That is true, Mark, and yet you should not be timid because of it, +for you are best fitted to act the part of leader, and we know full +well you will only do that which seems safest." + +"Are you agreed that we cannot surrender?" and Mark asked the +question in an angry tone, as if expecting she would refuse to view +the situation in the same light he did. + +"Of course I am. Could I say otherwise after all the stories we have +heard from the mainland?" + +"Then we must fight?" + +"Of course, and to the last. I would rather see mother and the +children killed by musket-balls, than to have them fall unharmed +into the hands of those who await us there," and she motioned toward +the harbor island. "How long can we hold the stockade against such a +force?" + +"Four and twenty hours, it may be, and a much shorter time if you, +or Luke, or I should be killed early in the fight." + +"And we will hope that our fathers do not come back until all is +over." + +"Ay, Sue dear, that is what we must hope, unless we would have them +come in time to meet their death. Two more men on the stockade would +not greatly prolong the struggle, and I fail to see how they, +without other aid, could help us very much." + +"If it should be, Mark dear, that I am wounded again, will you see +to it that the Indians do not take me prisoner?" + +"Ay, Sue, though the moment will be a terrible one when I turn my +musket against you; but it shall be done." + +"And if you are left until the last you will see that the children +are not taken alive?" + +"If I am left, Sue dear, it shall be as the last of our families on +the island, for I believe death is more pleasant than can be life in +the hands of such as those who are counting soon to hold us in their +power." + +Then the two children kissed each other as if in a last farewell, +and Mark, trying to assume a careless air, said, with a feeble +attempt at a smile: + +"Since you were the last to awaken, it is no more than fair you +should be among the first on duty. You, Luke, and I will stand guard +alone until the attack is made, as we can count it will be this +night, and then our mothers must charge the muskets. Remember, Sue +dear, that I haven't yet despaired of holding the whole wicked crew +in check. It doesn't seem possible that God would withhold His hand +while we are being beaten." + +"And yet it has been that many people in this country, whose cause +was as just as ours, have been overcome by the same merciless foe +who await us." + +"Ay, Sue, and since we can only take what comes as stoutly as decent +English people should, we'll seem to be brave, however timorous our +hearts may become when the last moment is at hand." + +Then these two children, striving to fill the places of their +parents, began that vigil which both believed would be ended with +their death. + +Mark made the announcement to his mother and aunt, after the gate +had been shut and closely barred, that they and the children should +remain in the dwelling until the moment came when they could be of +assistance in loading the weapons, and in the meanwhile the task of +guarding the stockade would devolve upon his brother, cousin, and +himself. + +"We are not so much worse off than before, except that many more +will come against us," he said, as the women and children went +toward the Pemberton house. "We shall fight until the last, and, if +God is kind, it may be we can hold the villains in check four and +twenty hours, if no more. Get what rest you can, and remember that +tears are of no avail when bullets are needed." + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +AN ATTACK + + +When the women and smaller children were inside the dwelling, Mark +said to his companions: + +"It is better to have something in the way of work on hand than +remain idle, and it has come into my mind that we might improve our +condition if we raised the top of the stockade so that we could +stand on the platforms without being seen by those outside." + +"How would you set about it?" Luke asked, with mild curiosity. + +"A heavy timber might be made fast to the top of the palisade, and, +by making loopholes between the upper ends of the logs, we would be +hidden from view, and at the same time be able to keep watch." + +"Do you count that we should go after logs, taking the chances that +the enemy will make a landing right away?" + +"I intend to go alone, while you and Susan stand guard. Shout if you +see a single boat putting off from the harbor island, and then I can +get inside the enclosure before the enemy will be able to paddle +over here." + +Mark did not wait to learn if his companions had any criticism to +make on his proposition, but set off in search of the axe without +delay, and the others had no choice but to mount guard. + +[Illustration: He returned with a heavy log.] + +When the lad went through the gate he directed that it be barred +behind him, lest there might be Indians in the thicket, and a few +moments later it was possible to hear the sound of his sturdy blows +as he felled the trees. + +In less than half an hour he returned with a heavy log that had been +squared on one side, and, after having been given admittance, he +laid this on the posts above the platform on which Susan was +stationed. By chopping either side of the uprights, close to the +top, he made V-shaped apertures of sufficient size to admit of a +musket-barrel being thrust through, thus forming five or six +loopholes for the sentinel. + +Therefore it was one could remain on the platform without being +exposed to view of the enemy directly in front, and such shelter +would be of great value to the defenders while the attacking party +was a short distance away. + +By means of wooden pins Mark secured the log in place, although not +very firmly, and the three children who were to defend the stockade +believed their position had been decidedly strengthened by such a +device. + +Another hour was spent in felling trees, fitting the timbers, and +putting them in place. Then Mark occupied himself with making a +careful examination of every portion of the palisade, after which, +he said, with a long-drawn sigh: + +"I can think of nothing else that is likely to improve the defences, +and it only remains to wait until the enemy is ready to begin +operations. What has been done aboard the schooner?" + +"Many of the men have gone ashore on the harbor island," Luke +replied. "The sails are furled, and everything snugged down as if +for a long stay." + +"Have you seen the Abenakis?" + +"Two or three of them yet remain aboard the schooner; but the larger +number are on shore." + +Then Mark clambered up on one of the platforms, straining his eyes +to learn what the strangers were doing with the hope of being able +to make some guess as to when another attack would be made; but in +this last he was unsuccessful. The men were lounging on the vessel, +or ashore, as if their only purpose was to pass the time pleasantly, +and utterly heedless as to whether they were seen by those inside +the stockade. + +"Whoever is in command of the Frenchmen will direct the next +assault," Mark said, sufficiently loud to be heard by his companions +at their several posts of duty. "It is known that we count on +defending ourselves, and we may expect to see the entire force +before us within the coming ten or twelve hours." + +"What about the powder?" Luke asked. + +"We have none too much; but enough, I believe, if we are careful in +making every shot count, to last us during two assaults. After that, +if we're alive, there'll be a short allowance." + +"A boat is putting off from the schooner, and heading this way," +Susan announced, and the boys gave no further heed as to +speculations regarding the future, for it seemed as if the enemy was +about to begin operations. + +In a very short time, however, it could be understood that there was +no danger of an immediate attack, for the craft coming shoreward +from the vessel was a canoe in which were but three men. + +The sentinels were unable to understand the meaning of this +movement. It did not seem probable the enemy counted on boldly +reconnoitering the island, nor was it reasonable to suppose any +attack was to be made with so small a force, and Mark said, in +perplexity: + +"I can't make out why they are coming; but we'll be ready for +whatever turn affairs may take." + +"Shall we fire on them if they get too near?" Susan asked. + +"Unless they claim to be friends, which isn't likely, we'll treat +them exactly as we would the Abenakis, if they were bold enough to +land in broad day," Mark replied, and, as assurance of his +intentions, he made certain his musket was ready for immediate use. + +The strangers paddled directly toward the spot where were kept the +boats of the settlers, beached the canoe, and straightway approached +the stockade, as friends might have done. + +The three children on guard watched the newcomers curiously, until +they were within fifty or sixty paces of the gate, and then Mark +hailed: + +"It will be safer to halt where you are until we understand the +reason for this visit," he cried, showing himself above the +palisade, with musket in hand. + +"Are you in command of the stockade?" one of the visitors asked, as +all three came to a full stop. + +"Ay, for the time being." + +"How many have you in garrison?" one of the newcomers asked, as he +advanced a single pace, to show that he was authorized to act as +spokesman for his party. + +"That is for you to find out," Mark replied, with a smile. "You must +take us for simples, if it is in your mind that we will give all the +information demanded." + +"I did not ask to gain information, for we know exactly the number +of women and children here. I desired that you yourself should state +it in order to the better understand how entirely you are at our +mercy," The man said, and his manner of speech told that he was +French. + +"I do not need to repeat it, having seen your force, and knowing my +own full well." + +"Then you can understand that when I offer good quarter if you +surrender without resistance, it should do away with any necessity +for a conflict." + +"Are you ready to give the same quarter your people promised at +Falmouth, when the defenceless prisoners were murdered by you +Frenchmen?" Mark cried, angrily. + +"I give you my word of honor as a soldier, than no one shall be +harmed if you surrender this place immediately," the officer +replied, sharply. + +"If I have heard rightly, the Baron de Castine gave the same pledge +at Falmouth, and afterward excused himself by saying that he could +not restrain the Indian allies," Mark said, stoutly. "Since then it +is difficult to believe that French officers have any too much +honor; otherwise, perhaps, they would not fight side by side with +savages." + +"Do you refuse to surrender?" the visitor asked, angrily. + +[Illustration: "Do you refuse to surrender?"] + +"Ay, that I do, and all here are of the same mind with me. It is +better to die fighting than be put to the torture by your allies, +whom, mayhap, you could not restrain." + +"My force is so large that you will be crushed in a twinkling, and, +if you resist, no mercy may be expected. I have come in the effort +to save your lives." + +"Why should it be necessary?" Mark asked. "What have we done that +you strive to take possession of our homes?" + +"That is not a question to be discussed," the officer replied, +impatiently. "It is my intention to clear this island of settlers, +and I hope at such time to aid you." + +"It is a brave piece of business to wait until our fathers have gone +away, and then come here to fight women and children!" Susan cried, +sharply. "Are all French officers so valiant?" + +It was impossible for the visitor to see the speaker; but he knew +from the voice that the words were uttered by a girl, and his face +reddened, as he bit his lip to hold back a retort. + +"I offer you good quarter, and to that pledge my word, if you submit +at once," he said, after a brief pause. "In case you are so foolish +as to dream of holding out against us, much loss of blood must +ensue." + +"That is bound to come," Mark replied, gravely. "We are resolved to +hold this stockade as long as there is one left alive to fire a +musket, and when you succeed in the noble work of murdering women +and children, there will be none left alive for the savages, your +very good friends, to torture." + +"And that is your last word?" the officer asked, half-turning on his +heel. + +"The last," Mark replied. + +The Frenchman stood irresolutely while one might have counted ten, +and then, wheeling about, he marched toward the shore, looking back +from time to time as if believing the young defenders might repent +of having given such an answer. + +"We have shut off all chance of making a bargain with them," Luke +said, half to himself, and Susan replied, stoutly: + +"It would have shamed me had Mark treated with them! Why should they +offer us quarter? We have done nothing to warrant their making an +attack upon us, and it is well they should hear the truth--that it +is nothing less than murder. People don't make war in such a fashion +as this!" + +Mark gave no heed to what his companions were saying. His eyes were +fixed on the canoe, in which the three men had embarked, and it was +in his mind that when they regained the schooner there would be a +decided change in the position of affairs. + +And in this he was not mistaken; within half an hour the boats +belonging to the schooner, and the canoes of the Indians, were +engaged in transporting the men to the shore of Mount Desert, half a +mile or more north of the stockade. + +"There's one satisfaction to be had in arousing the Frenchman's +temper," Mark said, grimly, when the work of disembarkation was well +under way. "We won't need to expect a night attack, and hang around +in suspense waiting for it, because the assault is to be begun some +time before sunset. We had best get out our supply of ammunition, +and warn the others that they will soon be needed." + +It was Susan who went to summon her mother and aunt, and when she +returned, carrying a heavy burden of powder and bullets, it was to +report: + +"The children are to be kept in the house, under charge of Ellen. +The others will be here in a minute or two." + +"They can't come any too soon," Luke said, nervously. "The Frenchmen +are already marching along the shore, with the Abenakis trailing on +behind." + +Susan was at her post of duty in a twinkling, and, looking out +through the rough loopholes, she saw no less than twenty white men, +ten of whom were armed with muskets, and the others carrying pikes, +the head of which glittered in the sun, marching in soldierly array +down the beach. In their rear slouched nine Indians, and it was safe +to assume that the remainder of the red-skinned party had been +disabled during the first assault. + +It was a positive relief to Mark when he saw that the enemy was +intending to march directly upon the stockade, most likely counting +on carrying the place by the first assault. If the force had been +divided, so that a portion might attack from the rear at the same +time the others were in front, the task of holding them in check +would have been well-nigh hopeless. + +Even as it was, with everything in the children's favor, it did not +seem possible they could defend themselves against such a force; but +Mark said, as if believing the chances for success were very good: + +"Remember that we can't afford to waste any bullets. If each of us +could hit the target three times in succession, I warrant you those +valiant Frenchmen would be eager to gain the shelter of their +vessel. Both of you can strike four squirrels out of five at fifty +paces, and surely you should be able to do as well when the mark is +so much larger and moving slowly. Don't shoot until you are certain +of hitting your man, and we'll soon see those fellow's backs." + +Mistress Pemberton and Mistress Harding had come to do their share +in the one-sided battle. Both the women looked pale and distressed, +as was but natural under the desperate circumstances; but a single +glance at their faces would have told that they believed the only +course to be a stout resistance, even though it should cost the +lives of all. + +At the shore, directly in front of the stockade, the Indians forced +a halt of the white men, by seemingly insisting that some other +method of procedure be adopted, and during two or three minutes it +appeared as if they would carry their point. + +Mark drew a long breath of relief, however, when the officer who had +demanded the surrender pushed his way past the savages with a +threatening gesture, as he ordered the men forward again. + +"They are coming straight on in a body," he said, in a low tone. +"When you are certain of hitting the mark, shoot, and have the +second musket where it can be got at quickly. If we could get in six +fair shots at the start, it would be a big advantage." + +Each of the children on the platforms had two muskets loaded, and +the women stood ready to take every weapon as soon as it was empty. +The ammunition, divided into three portions, was near the +sharpshooters, and nothing remained to be done save take part in the +life or death struggle so near at hand. + +Steadily the French marched toward the stockade, evidently intending +to begin the attack near the gate, and it was Susan who fired the +first shot. + +As the report of her musket rang out, one of the foremost men +plunged forward to the ground, and five seconds later Mark brought +another of the enemy down. + +Luke fired, but failed of doing execution. He seized the second +musket hurriedly, however, and crippled his foe, thus doing half as +much as Mark had required. + +"Three down in four shots isn't so bad!" the leader cried, +encouragingly, and the words were hardly more than spoken before +both he and Susan fired the second time, each of the bullets finding +its billet. + +Now it was that the Frenchmen halted without the word of command, +and opened fire. + +During three or four minutes it was as if a perfect hail-storm of +lead raged around the stockade, but the stout logs afforded good +protection. Never a missile found its way inside, and the spirits of +the besieged rose rapidly. + +Acting under Mark's orders, neither Susan nor Luke had attempted to +make reply to the furious shooting, lest a bullet accidentally come +through one of the loopholes, and when, because their weapons were +empty, the soldiers ceased the aimless firing, the children's +muskets had been recharged. + +"If we can do as well as we did before, those fellows will soon show +their backs!" Mark cried, cheerily, himself setting the example by +wounding the officer. + +Now the bullets came thick and fast during a full minute, and then +the foremost of the assailants began to fall back, carrying the +officer with them, and an instant later the entire party was in full +and disorderly retreat. + +Three children had actually beaten back twenty white men and nine +Indians, without having received a scratch! + +Not until the faint-hearted men were at the water's edge, beyond +range of those in the stockade, was a halt made, and then it +appeared as if they were holding a council of war. + +[Illustration: An instant later the entire party was in retreat.] + +The officer was laid in one of the boats, and the soldiers gathered +around him, the able-bodied gesticulating furiously, and the wounded +seated on the sand attending to their injuries. None had been killed +outright, but the majority of those who had been hit would not be +likely to take part in another attack, unless it was delayed for a +considerable time. + +It seemed as if the white men gave but little attention to what the +Indians said during this council, for the savages were shouldered +aside with scant ceremony, and after a few moments all the Abenakis, +for none had been wounded, stalked gravely southward, where they +were soon lost to view amid the bushes. + +"We're going to have trouble from those fellows, and it won't be +long coming," Mark said, as he leaped down from the platform, and +ran toward that portion of the stockade immediately in the rear of +the dwellings. "Keep a sharp watch over the Frenchmen, and let me +know what they are doing!" + +Then he began putting up a platform at that point where he could +overlook the thicket, which last had been allowed to grow +dangerously near the buildings, and had hardly mounted for the +purpose of making a hasty survey, when a bullet imbedded itself in +one of the posts against which he leaned. + +"What is the matter?" Susan cried. + +"The Abenakis have sneaked around here, where they can shoot while +remaining under cover. Let mother come to load my muskets!" + +The report of Mark's weapon followed the words, and from the thicket +two or three muskets were discharged, thus showing that the entire +force of Indians was lurking amid the underbrush. + +Susan came running toward her cousin, carrying a weapon in each +hand, and the latter asked, sharply: + +"Why have you left your post? The Abenakis won't kick up much of a +row until after dark." + +"There is nothing to be done at the other side," Susan replied, as +she set about dragging two or three lobster-pots toward the +palisade. "The Frenchmen are paddling back to the schooner, not +leaving one behind, and Luke is watching to see when they leave the +vessel again." + +Another bullet from the Thicket whistled uncomfortably near Mark's +head, and he understood that the most dangerous portion of the +attack was now to be met, for it was impossible to see a single foe. +The swaying of the branches or the tiny curls of smoke, were the +only tokens of an enemy, save when a weapon was discharged. + +"Keep down under cover!" Mark cried, when Susan would have mounted +the collection of lobster-pots. "They are shooting close, and if you +should be disabled we would be in even worse trouble than we are +now." + +"But you are showing them a target." + +"Some one must be here to hold them back." + +"Then I have the same right as you," and the courageous girl +clambered up on the shaky platform until it was possible for her to +look over the palisade. + +It was a most dangerous position, and, fearing lest she should be +killed, Mark left his station to chop away the ends of the posts to +make loopholes. + +"Now you can have a view of the woods without showing yourself," he +said, and would have gone back to his previous position, exposed +though it was, but that she stopped him by asking: + +"Will you do the same at your end of the fence as you have here?" + +"There isn't so much need for me to keep under cover." + +"There is ten times more reason why you should be careful than for +me to skulk behind the posts. Unless you hew the timbers at your +station as you have these, I shall change places with you." + +Mistress Pemberton added her commands to Susan's entreaties, with +the result that Mark was forced to protect himself so far as +possible, but while he chopped at the posts half a dozen bullets +struck close around the axe, showing that the Indians were on the +alert. + +When half an hour had passed neither Mark nor Susan had seen one of +their enemies. Several times they fired at the places where the +branches were waving as if some person was walking beneath them; but +no cry of pain was heard to tell that the bullet had taken effect. + +During this time Luke had reported more than once that the Frenchmen +yet remained on board their vessel, and when the sun was sinking +behind the hills Mark said to his cousin: + +"We're wasting too much powder and lead, Sue. I don't believe one of +our bullets has gone home, and we have sent far too many at random. +The Frenchmen are not beaten yet, and we must have plenty of +ammunition when they come again." + +"What, then, are we to do?" + +"I will stay here, keeping guard lest the Abenakis attempt to scale +the fence. You and our mothers shall attend to the household duties, +holding yourselves in readiness to come whenever I shout." + +"But there is nothing for me to do in the house." + +"Then take advantage of the opportunity to get a little rest, for +it is certain that we shall have our hands full during all this +night. Get supper, if nothing more, and then bring me something to +drink." + +"I'll do that first, and then look after myself," Susan said, as she +went toward the house, and a moment later Mark heard from her a cry +of distress. + +"What's the matter?" he shouted, wildly, fearing, for the instant, +that some of the savages had gained entrance to the dwelling despite +his careful watch. + +"The water! The water!" Susan cried, mournfully, and then came a hum +of voices raised high in excitement and fear, amid which the +sentinel could distinguish no words. + +"Come here, Susan!" Mark shouted, peremptorily, and as the girl +appeared he demanded, "Now tell me what has gone wrong?" + +"The children have spilled all the water we took into the house, and +there's not a drop to be had!" + +"But they couldn't have carried the spring away," Mark replied, with +a laugh, able to make merry even amid the terrible surroundings, so +great was his relief at learning that nothing more serious had +caused the cry which startled him. + +"The sheep have gathered there, until the entire place is a mass of +filthy mud." + +"Well, well, don't let that distress you so sorely. We'll soon be +able to clear it out, for I reckon these beggarly Abenakis won't +keep me busy more than twelve hours." + +"But if the Frenchmen should come in the meantime?" + +"We'll take our chances of that, and get along without water a +little while." + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +FIRE + + +Mark was disposed to make light of that which distressed Susan, and +thus did he make his first mistake in the defence. + +To his mind there was nothing very serious in the loss of the water +which had been carried into the dwelling, because the spring was +within the stockade, and however much mischief the sheep had done, +it would be the work of but few moments to put everything in proper +order once more. + +The chief thought in his mind was regarding the possible trouble +which the Abenakis might make while hidden in the thicket back of +the palisade, and, after this, the fear that the ablest of his +assistants might become disabled because of her wound, which had not +received the attention such an injury required. + +Therefore it was he said to Susan speaking almost sharply to the end +that she might feel forced to obey without argument: + +"The first thing for you to look after is that wound. Have your +mother dress it once more while you can be spared from the +palisade." Then, seeing that she hesitated, he added, "It is +necessary for the safety of all that you look after yourself, +because if you were disabled, we would be in most serious plight, +you being the best marksman among us." + +Susan hesitated no longer; but went toward the house, even though +she did not believe it necessary to give very much attention to her +arm, which was not so badly injured but that she could use it with +comparative ease. + +When she had disappeared within the dwelling, Mark, watching through +the loophole for a target, cried to his brother: + +"How is everything over your way, Luke?" + +"There has been no change. The Frenchmen are sticking close to their +vessel." + +"I reckon it would be safe for you to come here a few minutes. I'll +send Mary to take your place." + +The lad obeyed promptly, and, after cautioning him not to expose +himself to the aim of the enemy, although it was essential he keep +close lookout over the thicket, Mark went toward the spring. + +The damage done by the sheep was greater than he had supposed. The +earth in the immediate vicinity had been ploughed up by the feet of +the animals until the spring was nearly choked, and Mark realized +that a full hour's work would be required to repair the mischief. + +"We can't spend much time at it while the Abenakis are in the +woods," he said to himself. "Later in the might, perhaps, I shall +have a chance to do the job." + +Then he went to where Mary was taking Luke's place as sentinel near +the gate, instructing her to raise an alarm immediately she saw any +movement on the part of the Frenchmen. + +"Keep your eyes open wide," he said, "and, while watching the +schooner, give some attention to what may be going on close at hand. +I don't believe the Indians will come out of the thicket to show +themselves where no shelter can be found. But, at the same time, it +is possible. Remember that all our lives might pay the forfeit of +your carelessness." + +"You can trust me as you do Susan, although I can't shoot so well; +but my eyes are as good as hers." + +"True for you, sister mine, and between now and morning I'm counting +on your doing a full share of standing guard." + +Then Mark ascended the platform for one look at the vessel, which +remained at her moorings with but few men showing on deck, after +which he went into the dwelling, where his mother was preparing +supper. + +Susan's arm was being rebandaged, after having been bound up with +simples which had been gathered in the woods against just such an +emergency, and the smaller children were huddled in one corner like +frightened sheep. + +"I have left Luke in my place," the lad said, in reply to his +mother's question. "The Abenakis are taking good care to keep out of +sight, and it is only a waste of ammunition to fire at a waving bush +or curl of smoke. I'll get something to eat, now that I'm here, and +then go on duty again." + +Susan declared she would stand watch near the gate, in order that +Mary might take care of the children, and to that end ate supper +with Mark, after which the two went out to their weary, dangerous +vigil once more, with the disheartening knowledge that there was no +probability of receiving aid from any quarter. + +[Illustration: Susan's arm was being rebandaged.] + +"We won't talk about it, Sue," Mark said, when his cousin bewailed +the fact that even though a fishing-vessel should pass near at hand, +her crew would not come ashore when it was seen that the _Future +Hopes_ had left her anchorage. "We can't afford to look on the dark +side of affairs, lest we grow faint-hearted, for you know that, once +our courage is gone, we are the same as beaten." + +Susan did not reply, as she might have done with truth, that they +were then very nearly in that deplorable condition; but shut her +teeth tightly as if to prevent the escape of a single word, while +she walked rapidly toward the gate to take her station as sentinel. + +Mary begged to stand guard an hour or two longer; but Susan insisted +that she was needed in the house, and reluctantly the girl descended +from the platform. + +Then Mark relieved Luke from duty, instructing him to first get his +supper, and then, if the Indians remained inactive, to set about +cleaning out the spring. + +By this time the night had fully come, and Mark noted with +apprehension that clouds were gathering in the sky. While the moon +shone brightly it was as easy to guard against surprise as at +noonday; but once that light was obscured, the enemy might creep up +at a dozen places on the palisade without being detected. + +"Two hours of blackness, and we are done for," Mark said to himself, +with a sigh, and then, remembering what he had told Susan, he added, +"We've got to take whatever comes, and the only manly way is to make +the best of it. In case it is very dark to-night, Mary and Ellen +must both stand watch with the rest of us." + +The report of a musket interrupted his train of gloomy thoughts, and +involuntarily he ducked his head when a bullet came singing over the +fence so near that he felt the "wind" of it. + +"You can't tempt me to shoot till I see something to fire at," he +said, grimly, watching through the loophole at the underbrush which +was merged by the shadows into one single mass of gloom, amid which +not even a movement among the branches could be distinguished. + +Two more shots, which caused him to wonder why the Abenakis were +growing so active, and then he caught a glimpse of a faint spark in +the thicket, which at first sight appeared to him like the glow from +an Indian's pipe. + +He had raised his musket, intending to fire at the bright spot, when +it suddenly increased in size, and, while he stood speculating as to +what it could be, a long tongue of flame leaped upward from branch +to branch. + +No need for speculation now, nor was it well that he stand very much +longer on guard, for the terrible truth was all to plain. + +The Abenakis had fired the woods, counting on burning the palisade, +and thus giving them free entrance for the bloody business upon +which they had come. + +His first thought was to run for water, and then, even before he +could make a movement toward the spring, came the realization that +it was impossible to effect anything by such a course. + +He would not be able to throw water upon the fire in the thicket, +even though he exposed himself to full view over the top of the +palisade, and this was probably exactly what the Indians hoped he +might do. + +"It begins to look as if we had about come to an end of the defence, +and that nothing remains but to sell our lives as dearly as +possible," he said, gloomily, to himself. "Everything around here is +as dry as it well can be, and once the fire gains headway, even the +houses must go." + +Mark descended doggedly from the platform, and as he did so Susan +cried, from her post of duty near the gate: + +"What is on fire?" + +"The Abenakis have started a blaze in the woods." + +"Will the fence burn, think you?" + +"Ay, when the fire is well under way." + +"Can't we do anything toward putting out the blaze?" + +"Nothing, unless we want the Indians to shoot us down before we can +fire a shot." + +"Then what is to be done?" and in her distress Susan leaped down +from the platform to approach her cousin. + +"Better stay where you are!" the lad cried, warningly. "I don't +suppose it will make any great difference to us, and yet we should +know if the Frenchmen come ashore after seeing the fire." + +The girl returned immediately to her station, and even though he was +at a considerable distance from her, Mark could hear the choking sob +which escaped her lips. + +"Keep up a stout heart, Sue; we can make a last stand inside the +house." + +"Ay, Mark; but it will be the last!" + +The lad made no reply; he stood at some distance from the palisade +as if trying to decide upon a course of action, and while he thus +remained irresolute his mother came from the house. + +There was no need that she ask for information; the blaze was so +bright by this time that it must have been seen by those on the +vessel, and Mistress Pemberton inquired in a low tone, but with no +tremor in her voice: + +"Are the logs dry?" + +"Ay, mother; but it will be some time before the flames can eat in +very deeply. We've got fifteen or twenty minutes yet." + +"What is to be done?" + +"We'll take refuge in the house, and shoot down as many as possible +before the fire drives us out." + +"If there is nothing more before us, why not come inside now? The +Indians can climb up on the posts on either side and shoot you down +while you stand here in the light." + +"The Frenchmen are coming ashore!" Susan cried. "One boat-load has +pushed off already!" + +"We are going into the house," Mark said, hesitatingly, as if, even +now, when prudence demanded that they should seek shelter as soon as +possible, he was questioning whether he might effect something by +remaining in the open. + +"But if we don't stand guard the Indians will soon be over the +fence," the girl cried, nervously. + +"Ay, and if you stand there in the glow of the fire they can creep +up under cover of the shadows to one side or the other, and shoot +you down. We've done all we can here, Sue, and the remainder of our +fight must be made from the house." + +The report of a musket from the southern side of the stockade, and +the humming of a bullet close beside Susan's head, gave emphasis to +the lad's words, causing the sentinel to obey without further parley. + +Once inside the dwelling, with the door strongly barred, the older +members of the little party strove to appear unconcerned, each +hoping to cheer the other, and at no time since the island was +besieged did they display more courage than now, when there seemed +no ray of hope remaining. + +Through the crevices of the logs and the window-shutters could be +seen the glow of the flames, which were increasing each instant, +fanned as they were by short, furious gusts of wind which came from +the gathering clouds. + +"We must get under the roof, where I made the loopholes," Mark said +to Susan and Luke. "There's no question but that the Indians will +make a try at coming over the stockade before the fire has destroyed +it, else they have changed their natures completely, and we won't +give them full swing, even though we are cooped up here like rats in +a trap." + +"The boys want water," Ellen, who had been attending to the younger +children, said, at this moment, and the elders of the party looked +at each other in dismay. + +The new danger which confronted them had driven, for the time being, +everything else from their minds; but now all realized that, even +though they might not be permitted to remain long in that frail +refuge, they would suffer severely from thirst before the end came. + +"Get into the loft, one on each side, and shoot with good aim if you +see a painted face over the fence!" Mark cried, as he took up one of +the buckets and went swiftly toward the door. + +"You must not go out!" his mother said, as she barred the way. "It +is certain by this time that the Abenakis are where they can have a +view of the enclosure, and you will be shot down. Better that the +children should suffer from thirst." + +"We will all soon be needing something to drink, for it's bound to +be hot inside here when the palisade catches fire. One bucketful of +water will save us a good deal of suffering, and I'm bound to take +the chances." + +Then, before his mother could prevent him, Mark opened the door, +running at full speed to the spring, which was not more than twenty +feet distant. + +That the Abenakis were on the alert could be told when half a dozen +shots were fired in rapid succession; but, fortunately for the +defenders of the island, not a bullet took effect, owing to Mark's +rapid movements. + +To those who were watching him in agonizing suspense from the house, +it seemed as if the lad no more than wheeled about when he gained +the spring, and then came toward the building in a zigzag course, +well calculated to confuse the most skilful marksman. + +[Illustration: He reentered the house with a bucket two-thirds full +of muddy water.] + +He reentered the house with a bucket two-thirds full of muddy water, +and, while barring the door, once more said, in a tone of triumph: + +"I reckoned it might be done if a fellow used his legs well. That +stuff doesn't look fit to drink; but after the mud has settled a bit +it will be better than nothing. I am to blame for not cleaning the +spring out when I first knew that the children had wasted the +supply." + +"You have nothing with which to reproach yourself, Mark," his aunt +said as she laid her hand affectionately on his shoulder. "You have +taken the place of both your father and uncle, and there is not a +man grown who could have done more, or better, work." + +The lad's face flushed with pleasure at this praise, but he affected +to give no heed to the words as he clambered into the loft, musket +in hand, calling out when he was on the timbers above: + +"Give us the ammunition up here, and we'll load our own guns until +the enemy comes too fast." + +Mistress Pemberton handed him only a portion of the powder and +bullets, after which she stood on the top of a table ready to take +the empty weapons when the sharpshooters required her services. + +Mark was the first to discharge his musket, and a cry of pain +followed the report, telling that the ammunition had not been wasted. + +"What did you see?" his mother asked, anxiously. + +"An Indian's head over the top of the fence near the gate. There's +one villain the less to trouble us!" + +At this moment Susan and Luke both fired, the reports coming so near +together as to sound like one, and the girl cried, triumphantly: + +"I've hit another! What did you do, Luke?" + +"I don't know; he went backward at the flash, like a loon; but it +seems as if I must have struck him, for I had a fair aim." + +Mistress Pemberton now had work to perform, for those in the loft +soon learned that it would be impossible to recharge the weapons and +at the same time keep close watch on what might be happening outside. + +Seven shots had been fired from the dwelling, three of which were +known to have found their targets, when a heavy pounding at the gate +told of additional danger. + +"What is it?" Mistress Harding cried, and Mark replied, quietly, as +if it was of no especial consequence: + +"The Frenchmen have come, and are battering down the gate." + +"How long will it take them to do it?" Susan asked, her voice +quivering despite all efforts to render it steady. + +"It will be a good half-hour's job, with what timber they can pick +up near at hand. If they should cut down a stout tree, the work +might be done in half that time. Keep your eyes on the top of the +fence, for if one fellow gets inside he might succeed in pulling out +the bars before we could stop him." + +Twice more the children fired, and then it was as if the Abenakis +had tired of a game at which they were rapidly being worsted without +an opportunity to inflict any injury. + +"They've made up their minds to wait till the gate is down," Mark +said, grimly. "We must have all the muskets ready when the rush +comes, and shoot with good aim, for it will be our last fair chance." + +All this while the flames had been increasing in volume, and the +heat inside the dwelling, filled with the smoke of burning powder as +it was, seemed stifling. + +The younger children had drank of the muddy water eagerly, giving no +heed to its disagreeable appearance, and the older members of the +little company were already suffering with thirst; but never one of +them ventured to claim a portion of the scanty supply. + +"The fence is on fire," Mark said as he left his station at the +front of the loft to survey the scene in the rear. "The wind is +getting up in great shape, and coming from the east, otherwise these +housed would be on fire by this time." + +"There goes the upper part of the gate!" Luke cried. "Two or three +more fair blows, and the whole will be down!" + +Mark came back to where he could overlook the scene of what he +believed would be the final struggle, and the three children +crouched, muskets in hand, ready to empty the six weapons before the +enemy could approach the house sufficiently near to find shelter +under its walls. + +The two women were standing on a table, where they could reach the +weapons when they were empty. In one corner of the room, seated on a +bed which was laid on the floor behind the barricade of the door, +were the other children, some crying for water, and others weeping +with fear. + +The powder smoke hung heavily in the small apartment, which was +illumined by the glow of the flames, now not more than thirty feet +distant, and the heat was almost overpowering. + +The bucket in which Mark had brought the muddy water from the +spring, was empty, and the throats of the three children in the loft +were literally parched with a thirst that could not be allayed. + +They were beset by danger on every hand, and the supreme moment +seemed very near, for once the gate was demolished, however +desperately they might fight, the end was come. + +"We are not to leave here alive," Susan whispered softly in Mark's +ear, and he replied, pressing her hand: + +"That part of it sha'n't be forgotten, Sue dear." + +A cry from Luke; the crashing and splintering of wood; a shock which +could be felt by the refugees as the heavy timbers fell inward, and +the passage was open to the foe. + +"Take good aim!" Mark shouted. "Shoot at the foremost, and work +quickly!" + +While one might have counted ten the enemy hung back as if fearing +that a party of women and children might have planned an ambush, and +then with a yell of triumph, the opening in the palisade was filled +with armed men. + +The defenders in the loft fired at almost the same instant; then, +delaying only sufficiently long to fling back the empty weapons and +take up those that were loaded, three more reports rang out. + +The Frenchmen halted irresolutely for an instant, as four of their +number fell to the ground, and had the children been able to fire +one more volley immediately, it is quite certain the entire party +would have beaten a retreat even at the moment of victory. + +As the men, recovering courage, dashed forward, a heavy peal of +thunder seemed to shake the very earth, and on the moment rain fell +in torrents, coming as suddenly and in such volume as if having been +poured from some immense reservoir. + +The enemy recoiled as if confronted by an overwhelming force, and as +they wavered the children in the loft discharged three muskets, each +bullet seemingly taking effect. + +Then, suddenly, it was as if a black mantel had been dropped over +the terrible scene. A certain portion of the enormous downpour of +water was converted into clouds of steam by the flames, which were +literally beaten down, and those who had struggled so bravely to +defend the island could distinguish nothing. + +[Illustration: Again the crash of thunder drowned all sounds.] + +"What is the matter?" Ellen cried in alarm at thus being suddenly +plunged into profound darkness, and the younger children screamed +with terror. + +A deafening peal of thunder seemingly came in answer to the question +followed a second later by a vivid, blinding flash of lightning +which illumined the interior of the loft through the few crevices +between the logs, until the defenders could see each other's faces +gleaming ghastly pale. + +The water trickling through the roof restored them to their senses +somewhat, and Mark said, speaking as if with an effort: + +"The storm has been gathering since afternoon. Now, while we are +cooped up here in the darkness, the enemy can work his will!" + +Again the crashing of thunder drowned all other sounds; once more +the jagged rifts of unearthly fire, breaking though the clouds, +illumined the scene, and Susan cried, as if unable to believe her +own statement: + +"The men are running away! They are running away!" + +Mark and Luke sprang to her side, waiting for another flash of +lightning, and when it came, preceded by crashing thunder which +caused the house of logs to tremble, the enclosure was deserted. + +"It's true that some of them have gone; perhaps all," Mark +announced; "but the whole crew will come back when the storm is +over, and there will be nothing save our muskets to prevent them +from marching in at their pleasure." + +"Let us give thanks for the mercies which have already been bestowed +upon us," Mistress Pemberton said, devoutly. "The fire is +extinguished, and we need no longer fear being burned to death." + +"That might not be the worst that will befall us," Mark thought, +recalling to mind the fate of those settlers of Maine who had been +put to death by torture. + +Because of the fury of the tempest, it seemed as if its force must +be quickly spent, and the besieged waited in painful suspense, +fearing that the downpour of water would speedily cease; but the +moments went by amid the flashing of lightning and crashing of +thunder, without any abatement of the tempest, save as the wind +lulled for a few seconds to come in yet more spiteful gusts. + +When half an hour had passed, Mistress Pemberton insisted that the +three children should come down from the loft in order that they +might all be together during this respite from the cruel foe, and +when they were in the room below, freed from the fear of immediate +death, thanks were given to Him who "ruleth the tempest" for this +new lease of life, brief though it might prove to be. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +THE WRECK + + +Hope once more sprang up in the hearts of those who had been so +sorely tried, when the storm continued with greal fury. The +electrical portion of the tempest appeared to have passed away, +leaving the raging wind and pelting rain to guard the settlers who +of a verity had descended into the very valley of the shadow of +death. + +When it was understood that that which was at first supposed to be a +summer gale had developed into a furious northeast storm, giving no +token of subsiding, Mark said as he rose to his feet: + +"When the rain first came it seemed as if my throat was parched dry +with thirst, and now that water is to be had in abundance, all hands +of us appear to have forgotten that we wanted a drink." + +"We might catch some of the water that is finding its way through +the roof," Mistress Pemberton said as if such a possibility had +never occurred to her before. + +"We can do better than that, mother dear. I'll go to the spring for +a full bucket, and when it has been strained we shall have what will +be an improvement on rainwater." + +"But possibly some of the enemy may be lurking outside," Mistress +Harding said, becoming timorous once more, now that the imminent +danger had passed. + +"Whoever has been out in the storm all this while will be harmless, +aunt, for his musket would be filled with something other than +powder," Mark replied with a laugh, and then he unbarred the door, +surprised to find that it was only with difficulty he could make +headway against the furious blasts. + +So powerful was the wind that it became necessary for Susan and Luke +to unite their strength in order to close the door while Mark was +absent, and when he returned with a brimming bucket of discolored +water, the three had no little difficulty in putting the bars into +place again. + +"It is the fiercest storm I ever saw!" Mark exclaimed as he dashed +the rain-drops from his face. "We'll pray that the _Future Hopes_ is +in a snug harbor, otherwise she will have to scud, for I don't +believe they could heave her to." + +"Do you think there is any probability your father and uncle may be +out in this tempest?" Mistress Pemberton asked, more anxious now for +the safety of the absent ones then she previously had been +concerning herself. + +"They are too good sailors, mother dear, to take many chances, and +we had fair warning of this storm. If we hadn't been in such sore +straits, there's no question but that we would have been prepared +for it. I noticed the clouds gathering, but at the time thought only +that it would be our misfortune, since we could not keep watch of +the Indians. Close-reefed, and with plenty of sea-room, the _Future +Hopes_ will ride out this gale without doing more harm to herself +than the straining of a seam, perhaps." + +"The Frenchmen could not have had time to get their vessel under +way," Mistress Pemberton said as if thinking aloud, and Mark sprang +to his feet in excitement. + +"Of course they couldn't, and it is well for them if they didn't +succeed in getting on board, for the craft never had been built that +can ride at anchor to the eastward of the brook while the wind is so +heavy. It would have been impossible to get under way, for she'd be +on the rocks before her nose could be brought around into the wind!" + +"Do you suppose they are yet on the island?" + +"I think, unless all hands are good sailors, that they'd try to get +on board, and that could have been done because the sea wouldn't +grow heavy in an instant." + +Further speculation as to the fate of their foes was checked very +suddenly by what sounded like the groaning of a human being in +deepest distress, coming from one corner of the room in which they +were seated. + +Instinctively the inmates of the dwelling clutched each other, for +it was impossible to see anything in that profound darkness, and +during many seconds no one spoke. + +Then the dismal sound could be heard once more, and Mark, forcing +himself to beat down the fear which assailed him, said, with an +effort: + +"Can you find one of the candles, mother? Some one here must be +dying. Where are the children?" + +"Johnny and Jimmie are with me," Ellen said, and Mary added: + +"I'm here with Luke." + +"No one could have got inside without our knowing it," Mistress +Pemberton said, as she groped around for the scanty store of +candles, which were reserved for use on especial occasions. + +Mark did not reply until his mother succeeded, after many fruitless +efforts, in striking a spark from the steel and flint on the tinder, +and as the feeble flame of the candle flickered and flared in the +wind which made its way through the crevices, the lad began to tear +away the barricade of household goods which had been thrown up to +screen the window. + +"It is useless to search there," Mistress Pemberton said, quickly, +as if a sudden thought had come to her. "One of those whom you +wounded is lying outside, and we hear his moans because he is close +beside the building." + +Mark was at the door in an instant, forgetting that he was hastening +to the succor of one who, a short hour previous, was bent on killing +him, and Susan seized the lad by the arm, as she said in a tone of +caution: + +"It may be some trick to get you outside. Be careful what you do; we +have heard that the Indians often make use of such means to get a +victim in their clutches." + +"I'll warrant there is no Indian living who could stay out in this +storm an hour or more, and then be able to do very much mischief," +Mark replied as he unfastened the bar, waiting only long enough for +Luke and Susan to get hold of the door, lest it should be torn from +its hinges by the wind, before he darted out into the blackness. + +A moment later it was possible to hear his voice, as if he spoke to +someone, and then all was still, save for the raging of the tempest, +until he cried from the outside: + +"Open the door, youngsters. I've got a Frenchman here, who must be +very near death!" + +Then, as Luke and Susan gave him admittance, he came staggering into +the room with an apparently lifeless body in his arms, while +Mistress Pemberton shielded the candle as best she might, lest the +wind extinguish the feeble flame. + +Mark laid his burden on the bed, heeding not the fact that the water +was running from every angle of the stranger's garments. + +Like Mark, the two women forgot that a bitter enemy was before them; +but with gentle care set about ministering to his wants, if, indeed +he would have any more in this world. + +Now all the occupants of the dwelling were too much engrossed with +the work of saving the life which had so nearly been taken by one of +their number to be able to tell whether the storm was yet raging, or +if the morning had come. + +In a very short time it was learned that the man lived, although how +he survived after being exposed to the fury of the tempest so long, +could not be understood. He had an ugly-looking wound in the thigh, +and another in the left breast; but Mistress Pemberton gave it as +her opinion that he was not mortally hurt. + +"With good nursing, I doubt not but that he will live," she said, as +she dressed the wounds to the best of her ability. "But if he does, +what shall we do with him?" + +"There is no need to answer that question now, mother dear," Mark +said, gently. "We'll try to pull him through, even if we have +already done our best to kill him, and then he'll know what it is to +have coals of fire heaped on his head; that is," he added, after a +brief pause, "if his comrades allow us to live long enough to do the +job." + +A fire was built, tea of herbs made and administered to the +sufferer, and before morning came it was possible for him to speak. + +He was sufficiently acquainted with the English language to make +them understand him, and his first words were expressive of surprise. + +"Save when you attack us without cause, we have no desire for your +death," Mistress Pemberton replied. "Now you are no longer a +soldier, striving to do us grievous injury, but a suffering fellow +creature, and so long as it is in our power we will do whatsoever we +may toward giving you aid." + +The wounded man turned his face away, as if ashamed to look the good +woman in the face, and after a time Mark questioned him as to how +the chanced to be so near the house. + +From his story, told little by little because of the difficulty +experienced in talking, the facts were soon known. + +He had been among the first to burst through the gate, and was not +wounded until when the last shot was fired. Then instinct prompted +him to gain a shelter under the wall of the building, where it would +not be possible for those on the inside to see him, immediately +after which he lost consciousness. During a long while he remained +as if dead, and it is probable that the deluge of rain served to +revive him after a time; but he was ignorant of having made any +outcry. He remembered of realizing that he was alone, exposed to +the storm, and the next knowledge was that the women were striving +to nurse him back to life. + +[Illustration: The next knowledge was that the women were trying to +nurse him back to life.] + +It was morning before the inmates of the dwelling gave much heed to +anything save the wounded soldier, and then Mark, after cautioning +the remainder of the family to stay inside the dwelling unless they +heard his cry for help, ventured out into the tempest, which +continued with but little decrease of violence. + +The sun had not yet risen, and it the gray light of early dawn it +was not possible to distinguish objects at any great distance. He +had, in the immediate vicinity of the stockade, however, good proof +of the violence with which the storm raged. + +A portion of the palisade itself had been overthrown, leaving an +opening through which the entire force of the enemy might have +marched shoulder to shoulder. Trees were uprooted; the small boat, +which had been drawn beyond reach of the tide, was now within ten +feet of the battered gate, having been carried there by the wind. + +That the buildings within the stockade remained un-injured was due, +doubtless, to the thicket in the rear which served to shield them +from the full fury of the elements. + +Turn where he might, the same scene of devastation met his gaze, and +he understood that if any of the Frenchmen remained on the island +they would be powerless to depart, for their vessel could not have +outlived the night. + +The wind was yet so violent that only with difficulty could he make +his way from one point to another, and the rain beat upon his face +until it became necessary to shield his eyes in order to see +anything twenty paces distant; but he struggled against the +elements, making his way along the shore toward the place where the +Frenchmen's schooner had been moored. + +The vessel no longer remained at her anchorage, nor did he expect to +see her there; but he was not quite prepared for that which met his +gaze when he was where a view of the most northerly point of the +harbor island could be had. + +Between where he stood and the opposite shore was the hull of the +schooner, keel uppermost, tossing on the short waves, now completely +submerged, and again rising high in the air until the greater +portion of the planking could be seen. Clinging to this restless +wreck were six or eight human beings, and on the beach at his feet +lay the bodies of two men who had been beaten down to death during +the conflict of the elements. + +After watching for several moments the plunging, rolling remnant of +what had been a seagoing vessel, fitted to withstand almost any +buffeting of wave or wind, Mark became convinced that the wreck was +moored in some fashion, and then it was possible to guess very +nearly how the disaster had occurred. + +It seemed probable that when the first of the Frenchmen gained the +schooner's deck, after the fury of the tempest had forced them to +retreat from the stockade, the wild tossing of the craft as the +waves were beginning to rise induced them to let go every anchor on +board, under the belief that she could be held at moorings until the +storm had subsided sufficiently to admit of her clawing away from +the shore. + +[Illustration: He gazed at the struggling wretches on the bottom of +the wreck.] + +When the tempest was at its height, and after the attacking party +had succeeded in getting on board, the little craft must have been +literally blown down, until the water, rushing into the open +hatches, had caused her to completely upset. + +The wounded, and all others who were in the cabin, must have been +drowned offhand, and that some of those who tried to save themselves +by clinging to the hulk had suffered a like fate could be told by +the lifeless bodies at Mark's feet. + +Aid had come to the defenders of the island on the wings of the +tempest; and at the very time when it seemed as if all hope of +succor was vain, the enemy had been overcome by "Him who holdeth the +waters in the hollow of His hand." + +As he gazed at the struggling wretches on the bottom of the wreck, +some of whom waved their hands feebly, as if nearly exhausted and +imploring him to help them, Mark forgot that but a few hours +previous these same men had been thirsting for his blood, and +thought only that they were in sore need of his assistance. + +He ran with all speed to the stockade, shouting as he approached, +and when the women and children hastened outside, believing him to +be in distress, he hurriedly told of what he had seen. + +"Of all those who made the attack, I am satisfied that only the men +on the hulk remain alive. It is for us to help them if we can. There +should be enough of us here to drag our boat to the water, and Luke +and I will see what can be done in the way of life-saving." + +Sorely beset though they had been, no one thought at that moment of +the suffering which had been endured because of these men who were +now so near death; but all, even the youngest children, laid hold of +the boat to launch her. + +It was no slight task to drag the craft, small though she was, over +the sand to the water's edge; but the task was finally accomplished, +and then many moments were spent trying to find the oars, which had +been blown out of the boat during such time as the tempest forced +her upon the shore. + +A full half-hour must have elapsed from the moment Mark discovered +the wreck until he and his brother were ready to set off on their +mission of mercy, and then it was an open question as to whether +they would succeed in the battle against the boisterous waves. + +The members of both families stood near the water's edge, regardless +of the furious storm which was raging, as they watched with anxious +eyes the efforts of the lads. They had set out to save lives; but +very many times did it seem as if their own must of a certainty be +sacrificed. + +Fortunately they were partially sheltered from the wind by the +harbor island, otherwise the task could never have been +accomplished, and not until both the lads were well-nigh exhausted +did they arrive at the plunging hulk. + +Now it was that the most dangerous portion of the work must be +performed. Only at imminent risk of swamping the small boat could +she be taken sufficiently near the wreck to permit of a rescue, and +then it was necessary to handle her with the utmost skill, otherwise +she would have been stove to kindling against the side of the hulk. + +When the boat came close at hand, all the Frenchmen gathered at one +point, as if counting on leaping aboard at the same moment, and +Mark shouted, peremptorily: + +"You'll swamp us if more than one comes at a time. Lay back there +you fellows who are the strongest, and help the weakest first!" + +Then they quarreled among themselves, each insisting that he was in +the greatest need of help, and Mark, finally becoming impatient, +cried, sternly: + +"If you can't come aboard like decent people, we'll leave the whole +boiling of you to get along as may be possible." + +"There is not one of us who can cling to this wreck half an hour +longer," a man cried, piteously. "Already five have been washed away +and drowned." + +"Two of you take hold and send aboard that fellow who is lying +across the keel. He seems to be in the worst shape. Stand back!" +the lad added, as four men made ready to seize the small boat at +the first opportunity. "If you come in other order than I give the +word, I'll leave all hands." + +By dint of scolding, pulling the boat forward or back as the waves +threatened, and otherwise handling his small craft in a sailorly +fashion, Mark succeeded in getting four of the men aboard, leaving +three to be rescued later. + +The boat would carry no more of a load than she then had, while the +storm was so furious, and the lads pulled shoreward, aided greatly, +when going in this direction, by the wind. + +The members of both families gathered on the beach near about where +a landing would be made, and when the shipwrecked men had been set +ashore they were helped toward the stockade by the women and +children, for the Frenchmen were so nearly exhausted that it was +impossible to walk unaided. + +Then Mark and Luke started on the second journey, battling quite as +desperately as before, and the day was fully half-spent when they +brought the last of the survivors ashore. + +It was not until the seven Frenchmen were being cared for in the +apartment of the Pemberton house where the wounded soldier lay, that +the lad began to realize the possible danger. These eight men, after +having recovered, might easily take possession of the stockade, and +Mark was inclined to believe that people who were willing to make +war on women and children, could not be trusted to play a manly part +even toward those who had saved them from death. + +"What shall we do with them all?" Susan asked, as she came out of +the house, which had much the appearance of a hospital, to where +Mark stood studying the matter seriously. + +"It has just come into my mind that we might herd them in your +father's house. The greater portion of the things have been taken +from there, and we can arrange it to bar the doors and shutters on +the outside." + +"Are you counting on holding them as prisoners?" Susan asked, in +surprise. + +"That is the only way we may be certain of a crew like that. After +all that has happened, I wouldn't believe in any promises that might +be made, and they shall be guarded like so many wildcats." + +"Every one of whom appears to be grateful." + +"Ay, I suppose they are now, before having recovered; but it may be +a different matter, once they're in good shape." + +"Do you believe there can be any on the harbor island?" + +"I'm satisfied there are no others alive out of all the crew of +French and Indians. Luke and I counted on burying the bodies which +have been washed ashore, and while we are at that work you had +better gather up all the muskets and ammunition, hiding the lot in +the stable until we have the men secured." + +Then, calling his brother, Mark set off toward the beach to perform +the last rites over those who had lost their lives while trying to +commit murder most foul, and, that having been done, the two lads +began transforming the Harding house into a prison, which last was +done by fastening all the shutters and one of the doors on the +outside. The other door was to be barred in such a manner that it +could be readily opened by those who were charged with the care of +the Frenchmen. + +These tasks were not completed until nightfall, and then Mark told +the rescued party exactly what it was his purpose to do, explaining +that he was not ready to believe in any protestations they might +make. + +"You must be held prisoners until our fathers return, and it is to +be remembered that if we find one of you attempting to leave the +building, which will be given over to your use, we shall shoot him +down without the slightest feeling of pity or remorse." + +The men swore most solemnly that they would obey every command which +might be given by those who had saved them from death, and Mark, +armed with a loaded musket, lost no time in escorting them to the +Harding house. + +It was his intention to have them closely guarded during every hour +of the day and night, and to such end Luke was stationed at the +front of the building, where, through a crevice which had been made +between the logs by Mark, he could keep his charges in view. + +Mistress Pemberton would not consent to having the wounded man +removed with the others. He was given a bed in one corner of the +room, after the furniture piled up as a barricade had been put in +place, and Mary and Ellen were instructed to watch him, not with the +idea that he might try to escape, but because his condition was +such, owing to the wounds and subsequent exposure, that the most +careful nursing and attention was needed. + +The storm subsided at sunset; the clouds disappeared, and the first +night after the besieged were turned jailers was as calm and +peaceful as if the harmony of nature had never been disturbed by the +clash of arms. + +Luke remained on duty until about ten o'clock in the evening, when +Susan took his place, and shortly after midnight Mark took his turn +at guarding the prisoners. + +The Frenchmen had shown no signs of a disposition to do other than +as they were commanded; but Mark would not put faith in them, and +kept his watch as if knowing they had already formed a plan for +capturing those who succored them. + +The lad paced to and fro in front of the dwelling, looking in upon +the men every five minutes, until a new day had come, and then as he +gazed across the waters watching for the sun to rise, he saw the +dingy canvas of the _Future Hopes_, glistening like silver in the +early light. + +The fresh breeze was bearing the little vessel swiftly on, and +before any inmate of the Pemberton house was astir, she swung to her +anchor close inside the harbor, while the two men listened to the +story which Mark had to tell. + +The fishermen had not been able to gain a shelter when the storm +burst upon them, therefore the _Future Hopes_ scudded before the +wind during the four and twenty hours, which explained why she had +arrived so much sooner than had been expected. + +It would be a labor of love to follow the fortunes of these two +families who, in 1758, defended the Island of Mount Desert so +bravely against the combined attacks of French and Indians; but +historians make no further mention of them, after setting forth in +the fewest possible words their deeds, therefore this tale must +perforce come to an end. + +We do know, however, from the records of Pemaquid, that Masters +Pemberton and Harding carried to the fort eight Frenchmen as +prisoners, and that the authorities of Massachusetts took them in +charge several weeks later. + +It is also known that in 1769 one Mark Pemberton, with his wife +Susan, settled on Penobscot Bay near where the town of Camden now +stands, and it is reasonable to infer that this man was the same +who, aided by Susan Harding, so bravely defended the island. + + + + +THE END. + + +[Transcriber's Notes:] + +Here are all the misspelled words, odd usages and other things of +note that I have found. + +The word "defence", as it is spelled throughout, is time period +spelling. + +1. This paragraph is accurate to the book. It could read like this: +"...otherwise the defences would not be being strengthened when the +boys should have been making ready...". + +2. The words "any one" appear to be time period usage. It is used +twice. + +3. The original does use the word "then" though it should probably +be "when": "...relieved from guard duty, and when the gate had been +closed..." + +4. The original does use the word "and": "...the gate was barred on +the inside, and Mary Pemberton standing close beside it..." + +5. The original does use the word "prosecute". I +suspect it is just time period usage. "...in position to prosecute +their murderous work." + +6. This paragraph is accurate to the book: "...there's no show of +our being able to do anything here..." + +7. The second "e" in the word "reechoed" is a small letter "e" with +diaeresis. + +8. The word "of" appears to be time period usage: "...uncle heard +from those aboard of the last vessel...". + +9. The word "resentiments" appears to be a misprint of +"resentments". "...gave vent to their resentiments and rage..." + +10. The words "some one" appear to be time period usage. + +11. The second "e" in the word "reentered" is a small letter "e" +with diaeresis. It is also used in the title of the 13th +illustration. + +12. This paragraph is accurate to the book: "...shake the very +earth, and on the moment rain fell in torrents..." + +13. The word "greal" appears to be a misprint for "great": "...the +storm continued with greal fury." + +14. The words "some one" appear to be time period usage. + +15. The word "of" appears to be time period usage: "...to permit of +a rescue..." + +[End of Transcriber's Notes.] + + + + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Defending the Island, by James Otis + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK DEFENDING THE ISLAND *** + +***** This file should be named 34558.txt or 34558.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/4/5/5/34558/ + +Produced by Zechariah Stover (ZechariahStover.com) + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/34558.zip b/34558.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..0b263fb --- /dev/null +++ b/34558.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e39fc1d --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #34558 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/34558) |
